Home

F7 Drive User Manual

1. Le eS P 6 2 UU UUUU eo M e sy t m MOUNTING HOLES n FOR AY SIZE SCREWS 1 3 1 e TONES E q b S inim SIZE HOLE SIZE L 2 HOLES SIZE J b j D 2 B D Y a pa RATED DIMENSIONS IN INCHES APPROX RATED MODEL OUTPUT NOM WEIGHT INPUT CIMR F7U CURRENT HP MOUNTING s HD ND2 AMPS Hef w2 D A 208V 202 85 88 25 30 15 16 7 68 21 06 10 00 0 30 1 16 1024 3 94 1 4 4 98 6 50 7 87 143 5 91 244 203 115 11 0 40 17 18 8 66 24 21 1098 0 30 1 16 1024 3 94 14 4 98 6 50 7 87 1 73 5 91 2 44 202 85 88 0 30 15 16 7 68 21 06 109 0 30 1 16 1024 3 94 14 4 98 6 50 7 87 1 73 5 91 2 44 203 115 11 0 40 17 18 8 66 24 21 10 0 30 1 16 1024 3 94 1 4 4 98 6 50 7 87 1 73 5 91 2 44 402 45 50 4 10 24 3 94 1 4 4 98 6 50 7 87 1 73 5 91 1 97 8 50572 40740 50 RS T7024 394 Uk 438 787 173 591 197 404 91 96 1122 41 174 5 18 6 69 807 1 73 669 244 4055 1124125 75 100 21 06 10 24 2 69 2 FOR REFERRE Y ENDORSED rere A THE DRIVE MUST BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW A MINIMUM MM OF FREE AIR SPACE OF 1 2 INCHES ON SIDES AND t 4 75 INCHES TOP AND BOTTOM THE DIFF
2. Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H Start Higher 00H Data quantity 08H Error code 03H Address Lower 20H Ist storage Higher 00H CRC 16 Higher FIH Higher 00H register Lower 65H Lower 31H Quantity Lower 04H Nextstorage Higher 00H Higher 45H register Lower 00H CRC 16 Lower FOH Next storage Higher 00H register Lower 00H Nextstorage Higher 01H register Lower Higher AFH CRC 16 Lower 82H Fig D 6 Function Code 03H Message Example Write In Single Holding Register 06H Response Message Command Message During Normal Operation Response Message During Error Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 88H Higher 00H Higher 00H Error Code 01H Test Code Test Code Lower 00H Lower 00H Higher 86H CRC 16 Higher ASH Higher ASH Lower 50H Data Data Lower 37H Lower 37H Higher DAH Higher DAH CRC 16 CRC 16 Lower 8DH Lower 8DH Fig D 7 Function Code 06H Message Example Communications D 8 Loopback Test 08H The loopback test returns the command message directly as the response message without changing the contents to check the communications between the master and slave Set user defined test code and data values The following table shows a mes
3. Bit 0 Modbus communication error CE Bit 1 Bus error BUS Bit 2 E 15 SI F G communications error E 15 Bit 3 E 10 SI F G fail Bit 4 Control fault CF Bit 5 Zero servo fault SVE Bit 6 External fault EFO Bits 7 to F Not used CPF content 1 Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 Not used Bit 2 CPFO2 fault Bit 3 CPFO3 fault Bit 4 4 fault Bit 5 5 fault Bit 6 CPF06 fault Bits 7 to Not used CPF content 2 Bit 0 CPF20 fault Bit 1 CPF21 fault Bit 2 CPF22 fault Bit 3 CPF23 fault Bits 4 to F Not used Communications D 12 Table 0 5 Monitor Data Register No Alarm content 1 Bit 0 Undervoltage UV Bit 1 Overvoltage OV Bit 2 Heatsink overtemperature OH Bit 3 Drive overheat fault OH1 Bit 4 Overtorque 1 detection OL3 Bit 5 Overtorque 2 detection OL4 Bit 6 2 wire sequence input EF Bit 7 External Baseblock BB Bit 8 External fault 3 EF3 Bit 9 External fault 4 EF4 Bit A External fault 5 EF5 Bit B External fault 6 EF6 Bit C External fault 7 EF7 Bit D External fault 8 EF8 Bit E Cooling fan FAN Bit F Overspeed OS Alarm content 2 Bit 0 Speed deviation DEV Bit 1 PG open PGO Bit 2 Operator disconnected OPR Bit 3 Modbus communication CE Bit 4 Bus error BUS Bit 5 Waiting for transmission CALL Bit 6 Motor overload OL1 Bit 7 Drive overload OL2 Bit 8 SI R G alarm E 1
4. E 2 Peripheral Devices 2 nee eigenen E 4 Peripheral Devices E 1 Branch Short Circuit Protection Fuse Type UL designated Time Delay or Non Time Delay Fuse Class CC J T or RK5 Designators typical KTK FNQ FRS LPJ LPS JKS JIN or JJS Voltage Rating 250 for drives with 208 240V input 600V for drives with 480V input Circuit Breaker Type Inverse Time MCCB Voltage Rating 600V Recommended fuse and MCCB based on NEC Table 430 152 If available current ratings cannot be provided the fuse rating A should match rated input current of the drive Warning Input fuses are required for proper branch circuit short circuit protection of all drives Failure to use the listed fuses may result in damage to the drive and or personal injury Table E 1 208 240Vac Input Fuse Selection Criteria MCCB Selection Criteria Rated Hp Model Maxi CIMR F7U Output iu Maximum Maximum MCCB ATE Time Delay Non Time Delay Rating A Fuse Rating Fuse Rating A 23P7 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2075 75 100 25 5 2011 2015 Peripheral Devices 2 Table 2 480Vac Input Fuse Selection Criteria MCCB Selection Criteria Rated Model key Time Delay Non Time dd Rating A Fuse Rating Fuse Rating ERN LERNEN NN NN wr mE ow que ow
5. 8 8 20 0 0 462 2 E 4 743 8 0 0 0 1920 0 as 312 E 0 150 0 current A Overload capacity 96 of rated output cur 107 107 108 107 107 114 116 120 107 120 120 rent for 60 sec Current limit limit 120 of rated output current Carrier DES 10 10 15 15 10 10 10 10 KHz Maximum output 400 0 H 0 Hz frequency 3 phase 200 208 220 230 or 240 Vac Maximum output voltage 5 Proportional to input voltage The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Drive s rated output current is appropriate for the motor s rated current 2 difference between Heavy Duty ratings and the Normal Duty ratings for the Drive are the rated input and output current overload capacity carrier frequency current limit an maximum output frequency Parameter C6 01 must be set to value of 0 for Heavy Duty ratings and 2 for Normal Duty ratings Factory default is Heavy Duty 6 01 0 3 Horsepower ratings are based on 230V NEC Table 430 150 480 Table 1 3 480 Drive Specifications Output ratings Output ratings Duty Normal Duty Rated output 13 0 18 0 240 30 0 34 0 capacity a8 aser rr 2 Overload capacity 0 Overload capacity 150 of rated output current for 60
6. 552 197 130 88 47 5 17 0 17 0 10 10 11 22 732 n81 787 28 28 787 258 14 463 511 621 307 138 132 4011 240 270 15 15 20 1122 732 1181 787 28 28 787 258 V4 463 511 621 307 138 132 4015 31 0 34 0 20 25 1319 850 1378 945 30 47 827 307 14 5 2 579 665 394 173 22 4018 39 0 40 0 25 30 1319 850 1378 945 30 47 827 307 1 4 542 579 665 394 173 22 FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS PROPERLY ENDORSED IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE ADEQUATE COOLING THE DRIVE MUST BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW A MINIMUM OF FREE AIR SPACE OF 1 2 INCHES ON SIDES AND 4 75 INCHES TOP AND BOTTOM DRBY EK 11 05 02 THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN HEAVY DUTY HD AND NORMAL DUTY 2 ND2 IS THE RATED HORSEPOWER 111202 RATED OUTPUT CURRENT AND THE OVERLOAD CAPACITY PARAMETER C6 01 MUST BE SET TO VALUE OF 0 APPVL FOR HEAVY DUTY AND 2 FOR NORMAL DUTY 2 FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING IS HEAVY DUTY 6 01 0 Physical Installation 1 7 DIMENSIONS F NEMA 7 208 240V F7U2022 2030 480V F7U4022 4055 rH
7. Replace with new board Determine need by inspection Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions Ambient temperature Yearly average of 86 F 30 C Load factor 80 maximum Operating time 12 hours maximum per day Maintenance 7 4 Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement Models CIMR F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018 A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Drive If the Drive is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Drive the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Drive from the installation panel If the Drive is mounted with the heatsink external to the enclosure the cooling fan can only be replaced by removing the Drive from the enclosure mRemoving the Heatsink Cooling Fan 1 Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan 2 Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and then pull the fan out in the direction of arrow 2 Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the power connector See Figure 7 1 4 Open the fan cover on the left and right sides in the direction of arrows 3 and remove the fan cover from the fan ag Power Fig 7 1 Cooling Fan Replacement Procedure the Heatsink Cooling Fan 1 Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan Be sure t
8. Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error Bit 5 Framing error Bit 6 Time out Bits 7 to F Not used 003EH KVA setting 003FH Control method Note Communication error details are stored until an error reset is input errors can be reset while the Drive is operating Communications D 15 Broadcast Data The following table shows the broadcast data Table D 6 Broadcast Data Register Operation signal Bit 0 Run command Running 1 Stopped 0 Bit 1 Run direction Reverse 1 Forward 0 Bits 2 and 3 Not used Bit 4 External fault set using H1 01 Fault 1 Bit 5 Fault reset set using H1 02 Reset 1 Bits 6 toB Not used Bit C Multi function digital input terminal S5 input Bit D Multi function digital input terminal S6 input Bit E Multi function digital input terminal S7 input BitF Multi function digital input terminal S8 input 0002H Frequency reference 30000 10096 Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously Enter Command When writing parameters to the Drive from the master using Modbus communication the parameters are temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Drive and they will be lost if power to the drive is shut OFF To enable these parameters in the parameter data area which is retained when power is removed use the Enter command There are two types of E
9. gt me C1 07 Rate C1 01 Rate C1 02 Rate C1 08 Rate Fig 5 7 Acceleration deceleration Time Switch Over Frequency Basic Programming 5 8 Carrier Frequency C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection Description Low Noise 2 0 kHz 5 0 kHz 8 0 kHz 6 O 10 0 kHz 12 5 kHz 15 0 kHz Program The factory default setting is model dependent Parameter C6 02 sets the switching frequency of the Drive s output transistors It can be changed in order to reduce audible carrier noise and also reduce leakage current Cases that may require adjustment to the C6 02 include e Ifthe wiring length between the Drive and the motor is long decrease the carrier frequency Wiring Length 164 ft or less 328 ft or less Over 328 ft C6 02 carrier frequency setting 1 to 6 15 kHz max 1 to 4 10 kHz max 1 to 2 5 kHz max If speed and torque are inconsistent at low speeds decrease the carrier frequency e If leakage current from the Drive is large decrease the carrier frequency e the audible motor noise is too great increase the carrier frequency The setting range depends on setting of parameter C6 01 Heavy Normal Duty Selection If Heavy Duty is selected C6 01 0 the Carrier Frequency Selection range is 0 Low Noise to 1 2 0 kHz If Normal Duty 1 C6 01 1 or Normal Duty 2 C6 01 2 is selected Carrier Frequency Selection range is 0 Low Noise to
10. 3 5 7 uw s s up sw o9 us pow pow p om s 3 CIMR F7U Amps Peripheral Devices E 3 Peripheral Devices The following peripheral devices may be required to be mounted between the AC main circuit power supply and the Drive input terminals R LI S L2 and T L3 Never connect a general LC RC noise filter to the drive output circuit CAUTION Never connect a phase advancing capacitor to the input or output sides or a surge suppressor to the output side of the Drive When magnetic contactor is installed between the Drive and the motor never turn it on or off during operation For more details on peripheral devices contact the manufacturer Magnetic Contactor Mount a surge protector on the coil When using a magnetic contactor to start and stop the Drive do not exceed one start per hour AC and DC reactor Install a reactor to connect to a power supply transformer of large capacity 600 kVA or more or to improve the power factor on the power supply side 4000 m AC orDC Reactor Required lt lt a 27 E o anl 600 AC orDC Reactor Not Required 0 60 400 Fig E 1 Connected Drive kVA Noise filter Use a noise filter exclusively for the Drive if radio noise generated from the Drive causes other control devices to malfunction See Chapter 2 Peripheral Devices E 4 Notes Peripheral Devices 5 Peripheral Devices 6 Appendix S
11. Upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parameters When writing parameters the parameter setting is invalid Write mode error Attempting to write parameters to the Drive during run Attempting to write via Enter commands during run e Attempting to write parameters other than A1 00 to A1 05 E1 03 or 02 04 when a defective EEPROM fault has occurred Attempting to write read only data Writing during main circuit undervoltage UV fault Writing parameters to the Drive during UV main circuit undervoltage alarm Writing via Enter commands during UV main circuit undervoltage alarm Writing error during parameters processing Attempting to write parameters while processing parameters in the Drive Slave Not Responding In the following cases the slave will ignore the write function When a communication error overrun framing parity or CRC 16 is detected in the command message When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Drive do not agree When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceed 24 bits When the command message data length is invalid If the slave address specified in the command message is 0 all slaves execute the write function but do not IMPORTANT return response messages to the master Communications D 17 Modbus Self Diagnosis The Drive has a built in fun
12. V MP AC RP R R S1 53 4 5 6 7 8 FM AC AM IG S S Fig 2 3 Control Circuit Terminal Layout Electrical Installation 2 2 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed loop Connectors Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 Refer to instruction manual TOE C726 2 for Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit wire sizes Table 2 1 208 240Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications Clamping Wire Size Recommended Terminal Torque Range AWG Wire Size AWG Screws lb Drive Model CIMR F7U Terminal Symbol 10 6 to 13 1 2 to 1 10 6 to 13 1 1 2 to 1 5 1 2 1 4 4 4 2 0 R LI S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 TTN 12 TL3 1 2 BL B2 12 to 1 U T1 V T2 W T3 3 5 to 5 5 3 5 RILI S L2 TL3 1 10 1 VES W T3 5 5 5 5 R LI S L2 TL3 1 2 B1 B2 4 2 D1 W2 21 99 806 8 S L2 T L3 1 2 BI B2 6164 22 600 14 to 22 6 UL Approved 14 vinyl sheathed 4 3 or equivalent R L1 S L2 P1 2 35 2 to 43 99 402 30 LH A 4 0 to 5 0 22 to 38 4 22 4 3 21 99 806 Application ms D M6 35 2 to 43 99 4 4 0 to 5 0 22 22 C R LI S L2 1 2
13. During run N O contact CLOSED during operation Digital Output Signals Remote auto operation N O contact CLOSED when in local control Multi function digital output Function set by H2 02 Frequency agree N O contact CLOSED when set frequency matches output frequency Multi function digital output Function set by H2 03 Form A Dry contacts capacity 1 A max at 250Vac max at 30Vdc Fault output signal SPDT MA MC CLOSED during fault condition MB MC OPEN during fault condition Electrical Installation 2 23 Forn C Dry contacts capacity 1 A max at 250Vac 1 A max at 30Vdc Table 2 11 Control Circuit Terminals Continued Default Function Signal Level Multi function 0 to 10Vdc 100 frequency analog output 1 Output frequency 10 to 10Vdc 100 frequency b 4 to 20mA 100 frequency H4 01 0 to 10Vdc 0 to 10Vde 100 Drive s rated 10 to 10Vdc Output output current Multi function Max current 2 mA 10 to 10 100 Drive s analog output 2 4 to 20mA 5000 Signals Output current rated output current Function set by 4 to 20mA 10046 Drive s rated H4 04 output current Analog Analog common Es 0 to 32kHz 3 5 High level voltages 3 5 to 13 2 Pulse input Pulse input frequency reference c by Low level voltages 0 0 to 0 8 Pulse I O D
14. F Program Setting of F Program allows the carrier frequency to be varied according to parameters C6 03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit C6 04 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit and C6 05 Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain Basic Programming 5 9 Preset Reference d1 01 Frequency Reference 1 B 41 02 Frequency Reference 2 d1 03 Frequency Reference 3 B 41 04 Frequency Reference 4 Setting Range 0 0 to E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency Factory Default 0 0Hz d1 17 Jog Reference Setting Range 0 0 to E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency Factory Default 6 0Hz Up to 17 preset references including Jog Reference can be set through multi function inputs S3 to S8 The first 4 preset references and Jog Reference are accessible through the Quick Setting menu It is a two step process to set the Drive up for preset speeds First d1 01 through d1 04 and d1 17 must be programmed with the desired preset speeds and the desired jog speed respectively Next three of the Drive s digital inputs need to be programmed and wired as Multi step Speed Reference 1 Multi step Speed Reference 2 and Jog Frequency Table 5 1 Preset Speed Terminal Terminal Terminal programmed programmed programmed as Multi step as Multi step as Jog Reference 1 Reference 2 Reference Preset Speed Details oer O O The Jog Frequency input is given priority over the multi step speeds As shown in the above table it
15. Inside the Power Module me Inside the Power Module 5 ETCSISSOS3DIU ETCSISH10 Inside the Power Module 305 Ercemsosano rceno ow 5 Ercemssosawo 30s Ercenosan Eroso sibon060s bi D2 398 5 Table F 2 480 F7 Primary Spare Parts Continued Drive Model CIMR F7U ES Power Module Transistor Module DC Bus Fuse Heat Sink Fan Internal Fan masse NA o o a Lm 5 mener sess Cms emen NA Spare Parts F 3 Notes Spare Parts 4 Drives Technical Support USA Canada Technical Support for Inverters and Drives is available by phone as follows Normal Monday through Friday during the hours of 8 a m to 5 00 p m C S T Emergency After normal hours 7 days a week including weekends and holidays To contact Drives Technical Support please call 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 From the menu dial 2 for Inverter and Drive Products then 5 for Technical Support Drives Technical Support can also be reached by e mail at DriveSupport yaskawa com Support information such as te
16. Main Menu Programming ADV Initialization Select Language ADV Accel Decel Accel Time 1 ADV Accel Time 1 1 3005 0 0 6000 0 30 05 The Drive is first powered up Press the MENU key to scroll to Operation menu Press the MENU key to scroll to Quick Setting menu Press the MENU key to scroll to Programming menu Press the DATA ENTER key to enter Programming menu Press the INCREASE key until C1 01 Accel Decel is displayed Press the SHIFT RESET key to move flashing digit to the right Digital Operator 3 15 Table 3 14 Changing a Parameter in the Programming Menu continued Step Digital Operator Display Description Number ADV Decel Time 1 30 05 Press the INCREASE key to display 1 02 Decel Time 1 0 0 6000 0 30 05 ADV Decel Time 1 C1 02 Press the DATA ENTER key to access setting display 0 0 6000 0 30 05 ADV Decel Time 1 Press the SHIFT RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right C1 02 30 05 0 0 6000 0 30 0 ADV Decel Time 1 02 006 0 Press the SHIFT RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right 0 0 6000 0 30 05 ADV Press the DATA ENTER key to enter the set data Entry Accepted is dis Entry Accepted played for 1 0 sec after the data setting has been confirmed ADV
17. Parameter Defaults 208 240V continued Model Number F7U 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055 2075 2090 2110 b8 03 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 b8 04 57 87 51 79 46 27 38 16 35 78 31 35 23 10 20 65 18 12 C6 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 02 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 01 4 01 658 712 105 0 131 0 160 0 190 0 260 0 260 0 260 0 2 02 4 02 1 67 1 70 1 80 1 33 1 60 1 43 1 39 1 39 1 39 2 03 4 03 157 18 5 21 9 38 2 44 0 45 6 72 0 72 0 72 0 2 05 4 05 0 101 0 079 0 064 0 039 0 030 0 022 0 023 0 023 0 023 2 06 4 06 201 19 5 20 8 18 8 20 2 20 5 20 0 20 0 20 0 2 10 505 538 699 823 852 960 1200 1200 1200 2 11 E4 07 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 10 12 02 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 12 03 1 0 1 0 11 11 12 12 1 3 15 L7 L2 04 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 18 02 100 90 90 95 100 105 110 100 95 18 06 15 24 20 18 20 17 16 18 20 5 02 0 317 0 355 0 323 0 320 0 387 0 317 0 533 0 592 0 646 02 04 9 B C D E F 10 11 Capacity Related Parameters B 4 Table 4 Parameter Defaults 480V Model Number F7U 40P4 40P7 41 5 42P2 43P7 44P0 45P5 47 5 4011 b8 03 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 b8 04 576 40 447 40 338 80 313 60 245 80 236 44 189 50 145 38 140 88 C6 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C6 02 1 1 1 1 1 1
18. B 2 Parameters Affected by Drive Capacity Setting B 3 Capacity Related Parameters B 1 Drive Capacity Selection Parameter 02 04 sets the Drive capacity according to the model number Parameter 02 04 needs to be adjusted only when replacing a control board Do not change the 02 04 setting for any other reason If the Drive s control board is replaced the next time the Drive is powered up parameter 02 04 must be set to the appropriate value listed in Table B 1 for the Drive model number This will automatically program the values of all other parameters listed in Table B 2 to the factory settings for that particular Drive rating Table B 1 Drive Capacity Selection Voltage F7 Model Number 02 04 Setting CIMR F7U20P4 0 CIMR F7U20P7 1 CIMR F7U21P5 2 CIMR F7U22P2 3 CIMR F7U23P7 4 CIMR F7U25P5 5 CIMR F7U27P5 6 CIMR F7U2011 7 CIMR F7U2015 8 ael CIMR F7U2018 9 CIMR F7U2022 A CIMR F7U2030 B CIMR F7U2037 C CIMR F7U2045 D CIMR F7U2055 E CIMR F7U2075 F CIMR F7U2090 10 CIMR F7U2110 11 CIMR F7U40P4 20 CIMR F7U40P7 21 CIMR F7U41P5 22 CIMR F7U42P2 23 CIMR F7U43P7 24 CIMR F7U45P5 26 CIMR F7U47P5 27 CIMR F7U4011 28 CIMR F7U4015 29 CIMR F7U4018 2A A80Vac CIMR F7U4030 2C CIMR F7U4037 2D CIMR F7U4045 2E CIMR F7U4055 2F CIMR F7U4075 30 CIMR F7U4090 31 CIMR F7U4110 32 CIMR F7U4160 34 CIMR
19. Overload capacity Overload capacity 150 of rated output current for 60 seconds 150 of rated output current Carrier frequency 2kHz Maximum output 300 0 2 frequency Rated output ated ou t 13 0 21 0 26 0 30 0 38 0 capacity 2 Horsepower 1 Horsepower 4 0 EX 75 1 5 2 15 20 Rated output current A Overload capacity of rated output 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 107 109 107 current for 60 sec Current limit limit 120 of rated output current Carrier case io 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 10 10 10 kHz Maxi tput frequency Maximum output voltage 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480Vac Proportional to input voltage Rated voltage Rated frequency Rated input t Noe 2200 2 2 2 5 4 6 4 9 0 15 20 29 37 47 Heavy Duty Rated input t AR 2 2 2 5 4 4 6 4 9 0 15 20 33 40 48 55 Normal A Allowable voltage 10 15 fluctuation Allowable frequency 45 fluctuation TE Measures DC Reactor Optional for power supply harmonics 12 pulse Not possible Rectification 1 The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Drive s rated output current is appropri ate for the motor s rated current 2 A 3 wire phase shifting transformer is required on the power supply for 12 pulse rectification 3 The difference between Heavy Duty ratings and the Normal Duty
20. Reverse Jog is Jog Frequency Reference selected via multi function input terminals or JOG key is pressed 6 00Hz Jog Reference SS on the operator keypad Jog reference has priority over frequency reference to 4 Setting units are affected by 01 03 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running No StartUp 4 12 Control Mode Parameter Parameter Name Description 9 Digital Operator Display Range Setting Set to the nominal voltage of the incoming line sets maximum EI 01 Input Voltage Setting base voltage used by preset V F patterns E1 03 0 to E adjusts Input Voltage the levels of drive protective features i e overvoltage braking resistor turn on stall prevention etc Set to the type of motor being used and the type of application The Drive operates utilizing a set V f pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed There are 15 different preset V f patterns to select from E1 03 0 to E with varying voltage profiles base levels base level frequency at which maximum voltage is reached and maximum frequencies There are also settings for Custom V f patterns that will use the settings of parameters E1 04 through 1 13 E1 03 F selects a custom V F pattern with an upper voltage limit and E1 03 FF selects a custom V F pattern without an upper voltage limit 0 50 Hz 1 60 Hz 1 2 60Hz 50 Hz Base E1
21. YASKAWA 7 Drive User Manual This Manual also available on WWW armesaconm Model F7U Document Number TM F7 01 Warnings and Cautions This Section provides warnings and cautions pertinent to this product that if not heeded may result in personal injury fatality or equipment damage Yaskawa is not responsible for consequences of ignoring these instructions A WARNING YASKAWA manufactures component parts that can be used in a wide variety of industrial applications The selection and application of YASKAWA products remain the responsibility of the equipment designer or end user YASKAWA accepts no responsibility for the way its products are incorporated into the final system design Under no circumstances should any YASKAWA product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety control Without exception all controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and fail safely under all circumstances All products designed to incorporate a component part manufactured by YASKAWA must be supplied to the end user with appropriate warnings and instructions as to that part s safe use and operation Any warnings provided by YASKAWA must be promptly provided to the end user YASKAWA offers an express warranty only as to the quality of its products in conforming to standards and specifications published in the YASKAWA manual NO OTHER WARRANTY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED IS OFFERED YASKAWA assum
22. 1 3 to 1 4 1 25 e 2 03 2P S L2 T L3 G1 81121 TI L33 15481975 17 6 to 22 5 U T1 V T2 W T3 N m 714 to 95 0 D 276 2 to 344 8 2 0 2 4 12 3 EC NE NI 1 3 to 1 4 A 1 25 703 2P 1 03 2P 603 2P li 00 1 200 5400 5400 Electrical Installation 2 6 Table 2 2 480 Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications Continued Clamping Wire Size Recommended Terminal Torque Range AWG Wire Size AWG Screws Ib in mm mm 1 2 R LI S L2 T L3 R1 L11 81121 TI L33 1548101975 803 2 17 6 to 22 5 2 03 2P U T1 V T2 W T3 703 2P 77 4 to 95 0 Application 03 8 8 to 10 8 Dependent 276 2 to 344 8 4 0 31 4 to 39 2 100 11 4 to 12 3 16 r l1 300 200 5400 5400 E 13014 uou 125 DT 4 03 2P R LI S L2 T L3 R1 L11 81121 TI L33 27620344 8 1003 2P 31 4 to 39 2 3 03 2P U T1 V T2 W T3 803 2P 77 4 to 95 0 Application 3 8 8 to 10 8 Dependent C 2716 2 to 344 8 1 0 2P 31 4 to 39 2 603 2 11 4 to 12 3 16 1 1 00 1 200 5400 5400 Es 13014 125 R LI S L2 T L3 300 x 2P U T1 V T2 W T3 RULII SI L21 T1 L33 150 x 2P 693 9 to 867 4 325 X 2P 78 4 to 98 0 Application Dependent 600Vac 3 0 x 2P UL Approved 80 x 2P vinyl sheathed or equivalent Drive Model CIMR F7U Terminal Symbol Wire Type 500 x 2P S L2 T L3 RI L11 SI L21 T1 L33 N A 325 x 2P 400 x 2P D A
23. 2045 208 240V Class V f Pattern Selection Max Output Frequency Max Output Voltage Base Frequency Mid Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage Min Output Frequency Min Output Voltage 1 For 480V class units the voltage values are twice that of 230V class units 2 These default values are for V F or V F with PG control methods A1 02 0 or 1 Table 5 4 V F Pattern for Drive Capacity F7U22P2 2045 for 208 240V Class continued V f Pattern Selection Max Output Frequency Max Output Voltage Base Frequency Mid Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage Min Output Frequency Min Output Voltage 1 For 480V class units the voltage values are twice that of 230V class units 2 These default values are for V F or V F with PG control methods A1 02 0 or 1 Basic Programming 5 16 Table 5 5 V F Pattern for Drive Capacity F7U2055 higher for 208 240V Class Factory Setting 1 03 V f Pattern Selection 0 1 2 3 50 0 60 0 60 0 72 0 5 4 5 6 7 0 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 Max Output Hz Frequency Max Output Voltage 230 0 230 0 230 0 230 0 Max Voltage i 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 Frequency Mid Output l 25 0 250 300 300 Frequency Mid Output Voltage 4 40 2 57 5 40 2 57 5 13 13 1 5 1 5 Frequency Min Output Voltage 5 7 6 9 5 7 6 9 1 For 48
24. A nameplate is attached to the right side of each Drive The following nameplate is an example for a standard Drive Drive Model Number MODEL CIMER FZLUZOTS SPEC 20181E 4 Drive Spec Number INPUT ALGPH 200 2008 HLrz45 Bes OUTPUT AC3PH 0 24 V 0 HET 1A Z7TEVA ND 74 8A CUN MASS 11 4 Weight SN 1 Ww BEH 1 234560 23 PRG lt at Software Number FILE Wie 131457 TYPE 1 ENCLOSURE IP Input Power Rating Output Power Rating Serial Number UL File Number Note The Drive Model Number Drive Spec Number and Software Number are required to completely identify a Drive HD Heavy Duty ND Normal Duty Fig 1 1 F7 Drive Nameplate Physical Installation 1 3 Drive Model Numbers The model number on the nameplate indicates the design specification voltage and rating of the Drive in alphanumeric codes 7 92022 AC Drive 34 F7 Family UL Specification Voltage 3 phase 208 240Vac 3 phase 480Vac Fig 1 2 Drive Model Number Structure Drive Enclosure and Revision Code The SPEC number on the nameplate indicates the voltage Drive rating enclosure type and the revision code of the Drive in alphanumeric codes The SPEC number for Drives that have custom features i e CASE software will have a SPEC number that indicates the custom features installed 20221 Hardware R
25. EN Decel Time 4 selected via a multi function input 0 0 Fast Stop Time Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero for to 100 Fast Stop Time the multi function input Fast Stop function 6000 0 see Accel Decel Time Setting Sets the setting resolution of C1 01 to C1 09 Unit 0 0 01 sec 0 00 to 600 00 sec Otol Acc Dec Units 1 0 1 sec 0 0 to 600 0 sec 1 Sets the frequency for automatic switching of accel decel times Accel Decel Fout lt 11 Accel Decel Time 4 0 0to Switch Frequency Fout gt 1 11 Accel Decel Time 1 200 0 0 0Hz Acc Dec SW Freq Multi function inputs Multi Acc Dec 1 and Multi Acc Dec 2 i have priority over C1 11 S Curve Accel Decel S Curve Characteristic at 5 Accel Start S curve is used to further soften the starting and stop SCrv Acc Start ping ramp The longer the S curve time the softer S Curve Characteristic at the starting and stopping ramp Accel End Run SCrv Acc End dd E OFF 0 00 2 2 50 S Curve Characteristic at Output fr quency Decel Start SCrv Dec Start eee C2 03 S Curve Characteristic at Decel End SCrv Dec End Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running 0 20sec 0 20sec 0 20sec 0 00sec Parameters A 9 Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Parameter No Slip Compensation Gain Slip Comp Gain Slip Compensation C3 01 C3 02 Primary Delay Time Slip Comp Time Slip Com
26. Espanol Portugues Selects which parameters are accessible via the digital operator Access Level Selection 0 Operation Only Access Level 1 User Level only available if A2 parameters have been set 2 Advanced Level Selects the Control Method of the drive Control Method Selection 0 V f control without PG Control Method 1 V f control with PG 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector Closed Loop Vector Used to return all parameters to their factory or user default settings Initializes and then returns A1 03 to zero 0 No Initialize 1110 User Initialize The user must first set their own parameter values and then store them using parameter 02 03 2220 2 Wire Initialization 3330 3 Wire Initialization 1 04 Password 1 When the value set into 1 04 does match the value set into Enter Password 1 05 parameters A1 01 thru A1 03 and A2 01 thru A2 32 cannot be changed other parameters as determined by A1 01 can be 1 05 Password 2 changed Parameter A1 05 can be accessed by pressing the MENU Select Password key while holding the RESET key E User Parameters User Parameter 1 User Parameter 2 User Parameter 3 User Parameter 4 User Parameter 5 Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access Level A2 05 SET 1 01 1 These parameters are not related to the User Initialize User Param 5 function U Initialize Parameters Init Parameters A2 06 User Parameter 6 ser Param 6 User Parameter
27. H S lt ool 1 PAS LATET N B 5 5 lt T P M 9 MS ji pan Eg SSS 20 4 AIR 2 w D b BOTTOM VIEW RATED DIMENSIONS IN INCHES APPROX RATED MODEL OUTPUT WEGHT INPUT CIMR F7U CURRENT MOUNTING i HD ND2 AMPS HD ND2 Hi wi H w w2 D Di B E F J 20P4 32 36 0 5 0 5 0 75 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 110 66 20P7 44 46 075 1 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 110 66 21P5 70 78 1 1 5 2 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 110 66 222 96 108 2 3 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 110 66 208V 23P7 15 0 16 8 3 5 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 709 232 10 552 197 110 88 25P5 230 230 5 NA 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 709 232 10 552 197 110 88 27P5 31 0 31 0 e 11 22 732 1181 787 28 28 787 258 14 463 5 11 621 307 138 132 2011 45 0 46 2 15 1122 732 1220 787 28 28 787 258 V4 463 511 621 307 138 154 2015 58 0 59 4 15 20 1319 850 1378 945 30 47 27 307 V4 512 579 665 394 1 73 242 2018 71 0 748 20 25 1319 850 1456 945 30 47 827 3 07 V4 512 579 665 394 173 242 20P4 3 2 3 6 02075 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 110 66 20 7 4 1 4 6 104
28. Mounting Screw Fig 7 3 Terminal Card Removal Procedure Maintenance 7 7 Notes Maintenance 7 8 Appendix Parameters This appendix lists all the parameter numbers and names along with a description of each The abbreviated name as it appears on the digital operator display keypad is shown in bold type F7 Parameler LSE A 3 EF Monitor cte du dux eet tuere A 40 F7 Fault Trace List oet A 43 F7 Fault History EISE iro ette tr EE A 43 Parameters 1 Some parameters in the following tables are not available for all Control Methods 1 02 Use the key below to determine which parameters are available for the selected Control Method E a WES x Vector gt Parameters which be monitored and set in either Quick Setting or Advanced Programming Menu A Parameters which can be monitored and set in only Advanced Programming Menu Parameters which cannot be monitored or set for the selected Control Method Parameters 2 7 Parameter List Table A1 F7 Parameter List Control Method Parameter Parameter Name 65 Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting Vector aay Initialization Language selection for the digital operator This parameter is not reset to the factory setting by 1 03 English Japanese Deutsch 0 Language Selection 5 3 Francais 4 5 6 Select Language Italiano
29. PG Overspd Time Excessive speed deviation detection level 0 to 50 10 PG Deviate Level Configures the speed deviation fault DEV detection DEV fault will occur if the speed deviation is greater than the F1 10 setting for a time longer than F1 11 1 10 is set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency E1 04 Speed deviation is the difference between actual motor speed and Excessive speed deviation the frequency reference command See F1 04 0 0 to detection delay time 10 0 0 5 sec PG Deviate Time Denotes that parameter be changed when the Drive is running Parameters 18 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting Open Loop F1 12 Number of PG gear teeth 1 PG Gear Teeth1 Sets the gear ratio between the motor shaft and the encoder PG Input pulses from PG x 60 F1 13 F1 01 F1 12 Vector A gear ratio of 1 will be used if either of these parameters is set to Number of PG gear teeth 2 0 This function is not available in flux vector control PG Gear Teeth2 F1 14 an detection Configures the PG open PGO function PGO will be detected if PGO Detect Time no PG pulses are detected for a time longer than F1 14 See F1 02 Ss Al 14 Setup Sets the function for channel 1 to 3 of the AI 14B analog input reference option board 0 3 channel individual Channel 1 terminal 1 Channel 2 A
30. Protective covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Drive It is recommended to remove the protective covers before operating a CIMR F7U2030 4055 and smaller Drive in a panel to obtain the 113 45 C ambient operating temperature Observe the following precautions when installing the Drive Make sure to install inaclean location which is free from oil mist and dust inan environment where metal shavings oil water or other foreign materials do not get into the Drive inalocation free from radioactive materials and combustible materials e g wood inalocation free from harmful gases and liquids inalocation free from excessive vibration inalocation free from chlorides inalocation away from direct sunlight Controlling the Ambient Temperature To enhance the reliability of operation the Drive should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature variation If the Drive is installed in an enclosure use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 113 F 45 C Protecting the Drive from Foreign Matter During Drive installation and project construction it is possible to have foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings fall inside the Drive To prevent foreign matter from falling into the Drive place a temporary cover over the Drive Always remove the temporary cover from the Drive before start up Otherwise ventilation will be reduced
31. The PID Offset Adjustment parameter has two different uses Parameter b5 07 serves different functions depending on whether it is used on a standard PID loop or a Differential PID loop 1 Parameter b5 07 causes an offset to be applied to the output of the PID function in a non Differential PID loop Every time the PID output is updated the offset is summed with the PID out put This can be used to artificially kick start a slow starting PID loop 2 If the Drive is configured for Differential PID Regulation H3 09 16 then the PID Offset is the targeted maintained dif ferential between the signal measured on analog input Al and the signal measured on analog input A2 Sets the amount of time for the filter on the output of the PID controller Determines whether the PID controller will be direct or reverse acting 0 Normal Output direct acting 1 Reverse Output reverse acting Control Method Vif Open w Loop PG Vector 0 00 to Factory Setting Flux Vector Setting Range 100 0 to 100 0 PID Output Gain Setting m 0 0 to PIGMENT 25 0 PID Output Reverse Selection Output Rev Sel PID Feedback Reference Missing Detection Selection Fb los Det Sel PID Feedback Loss Detection Level Fb los Det Lvl PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Fb los Det Time Sleep Function Start Level Sleep Level Sleep Delay Time Sleep Time PID Accel Decel Time PID Acc Dec Time PID Se
32. 1 line x 13 characters 3 lines x 16 characters Key Descriptions See Table 3 1 RUN amp STOP Indicators See Tables 3 5 and 3 6 Fig 3 1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions Digital Operator 3 2 Digital Operator Keys The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Digital Operator Keys Switches between operation via the Digital Operator LOCAL and the settings in parameter b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection and 1 02 Run Command Selection REMOTE This key can be enabled or disabled by the setting in parameter 02 01 LOCAL The Drive must be in a stopped condition before it can be transferred to LOCAL or REMOTE mode Scrolls through the five main menus Operation DRIVE Quick Setting QUICK Programming ADV Modified Constants VERIFY and Auto Tuning Returns to the previous display before the DATA ENTER key was ESCAPE pressed Enables jog operation when the Drive is being operated from the Digital Operator LOCAL LI Q Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Drive is being operated FWD REV from the Digital Operator LOCAL Increases parameter numbers and set values INCREASE Used to move to the next item or data value Decreases parameter numbers and set values DECREASE Used to move to the previous item or data value Selects th
33. 2 00 Fast Stop N C Closed Normal operation Open Drive decelerates using C1 09 regardless of run command status Timer Function Input for independent timer controlled by b4 01 and b4 02 Multi Function Digital Input Used in conjunction with the multi function digital output Terminal S5 Function function timer output 01078 Selection PID Disable Terminal S5 Sel Closed Turns off the PID controller Accel Decel Time Selection 2 Based on status of Accel Decel Time Selection 1 and 2 Program Lockout Closed All parameter settings can be changed Open Only using monitor U1 01 can be changed Trim Control Increase Closed Increase frequency reference by value in d4 02 Open Return to normal frequency reference Not effective when multi step speed 1 to 4 input is closed Must be used in conjunction with Trim Ctrl Decrease Trim Control Decrease Closed Decrease frequency reference by value in d4 02 Description Open Return to normal frequency reference Not effective when using d1 01 thru d1 16 as frequency reference Must be used in conjunction with Trim Ctrl Increase Reference Sample Hold Analog frequency reference is sampled then held at time of input closure External Fault Normally Open Always Detected Ramp To Stop External Fault Normally Closed Always Detected Ramp To Stop External Fault Normally Open During Run Ramp To Stop External Fault Normally Closed During Run Ramp
34. 3CN Electrical Installation 2 34 Installation Before mounting an Option Board remove power from the Drive wait for CHARGE LED to go out Remove the Digital Operator front cover and option clip Option Clip can be easily removed by squeezing the protruding portions of the clip and then pulling it out Then mount the Option Board s The A Option Board uses a mounting spacer to secure the board to the control board Insert the mounting spacer as shown in Fig 2 20 After installing an Option Board into slot C or D insert the Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector from rising Refer to documentation provided with the Option Board for detailed mounting instructions for option slots A C and D A Option Board mounting spacer hole CN4 A Option Board connector CN2 C Option Board connector A Option Board mounting spacer Provided with A Option Boardy __ s Option Board mounting spacer gt H Lc onton Board D Option Board j D Option Board mounting spacer Option Clip To prevent raising of C or D Option Board D Option Board connector Option Board A Option Board mounting spacer Fig 2 20 Mounting Option Boards Electrical Installation 2 35 PG Encoder Feedback Board Terminals and Specifications The terminal specifications for the PG Encoder Feedback Boards are given in the following tables BH PG A2 The terminal
35. Closed OH2 alarm Terminal A2 Enable Closed Terminal A2 is active Open Terminal A2 is disabled Control with PG Disabled Closed Speed feedback control disabled ASR Integral Reset Closed Integral reset Terminal Not Used Terminal closure has no effect MOP Increase Closed frequency reference increases Multi Function Digital Input Open frequency reference held Terminal S4 Function Must be set in conjunction with MOP Decrease and b1 01 41 02 Selection must be set to 1 0 to 78 Terminal 4 Sel MOP Decrease Closed frequency reference decreases Open frequency reference held Must be set in conjunction with MOP Increase and b1 01 must be set to 1 Forward Jog Closed drive runs forward at frequency reference entered into parameter d1 17 Reverse Jog Closed drive runs in reverse at frequency reference entered into parameter d1 17 Fault Reset Closed Resets the drive after the fault and the run command have been removed Continued on following page Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 21 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Setting Range Factory Setting nic Flux Vector Vector Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Fast Stop N O Closed Drive decelerates using C1 09 regardless of run command status Motor 2 Selection Closed Motor 2 4 00 Open Motor 1 A1 02 E1 LILI
36. Decel Time 1 cB 410 0sec The screen returns to the 1 02 display 0 0 6000 0 30 05 DRIVE Main Menu Press the MENU key to scroll to Operation menu Operation DRIVE Rdy Frequency Ref u1 l ooou Press the DATA ENTER key to enter Operation menu U1 02 0 00Hz U1 03 0 00 ADV Decel Time 1 12 02 00 0 0 Press the INCREASE key to increase the set data 0 0 6000 0 30 0 Digital Operator 3 16 Notes Digital Operator 3 17 Digital Operator 3 18 Chapter 4 Start Up This chapter describes the procedures to prepare the Drive for start up and the procedures to conduct a Drive start up Drive Start Up Preparation 4 2 Drive Start Up Procedures 4 5 StartUp 4 1 Drive Start Up Preparation In order to provide the most reliable Drive available and to avoid any extra costs related to loss or reduction of warranty coverage an authorized Yaskawa service representative should complete this start up procedure Please complete the following checklist and maintain it in a secure location as technical service personnel may request information from this checklist Drive Start Up Preparation Date Start Up Person Company Name Start Up Location Sales Order Serial Printed Name Drive Location Phone Signature Own
37. E3 03 Voltage Max Voltage 5 E3 04 Motor 2 Base Frequency Base Frequency Motor 2 Mid Output E3 05 Frequency Mid Frequency Motor 2 Mid Output Voltage i E3 06 VA Mid Voltage E3 07 E3 05 E3 04 E3 02 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Hz E3 07 Frequency Min Frequency To set V f characteristics in a straight line set the same values for E3 05 and E3 07 In this case the setting for E3 06 will be disre garded Be sure that the four frequencies are set in the following Motor 2 Minimum Output manner or else an 10 fault will occur 240V E3 08 Voltage E3 02 E3 04 gt 052 E3 07 240V 0 to Min Voltage 510 0 480 Ha nr Motor Setup 2 Motor 2 Rated Current Set to the motor 2 nameplate full load current in amperes A Rated FLA This value is automatically set during auto tuning Motor 2 Rated Slip Set to the rated slip of motor 2 in hertz Hz Rated Slip This value is automatically set during rotational auto tuning Set to the magnetizing current of motor 2 in percentage of full load current E4 01 This value is automatically set during rotational auto tuning Motor 2 Number of Poles Set to the number of poles of motor 2 Number of Poles This value is automatically set during auto tuning Motor 2 No Load Current No Load Current Motor 2 Line to Line Resistance Term Resistance Set to the phase to phase resistance of motor 2 in ohms 0 000 to This value is automatically set by the auto tuning 65 000
38. Fault when CLOSED Reset when CLOSED Auxiliary frequency reference when CLOSED Multi step setting 2 when CLOSED Jog frequency when CLOSED Shuts off Drive s output when CLOSED Reverse run stop command External fault input Fault reset Multi step speed reference 1 Master auxiliary switch 24 Vdc 8 mA Photocoupler isolation Multi function digital inputs Digital Input Multi step speed reference 2 Functions set by H1 01 to H1 06 Signals Jog frequency reference External baseblock N O Digital input common Refer to Table 2 14 for connection details 15Vdc Max current 20 mA 15 Max current 20 mA 15Vdc power output 15Vdc power supply for analog inputs or transmitters 15 power output 15Vdc power supply for analog inputs or transmitters 0 to 10 4 100 to 10Vdc 100 H3 01 Multi function analog input 2 Function set by H3 09 Multi function analog input 3 Function set by H3 05 Analog input or speed command 0 to 10 V 20 kQ Analog 4 to 20 mA 100 Input Add totermmal Al 0 to 10Vdc 100 H3 08 Signals 4 to 20 mA 2509 0 to 10 20 0 to 10Vdc 100 0 to 4 10Vdc 100 H3 04 0 to 10 Aux frequency reference 1 Analog common Shield wire optional ground line connection point Multi function digital output Function set by H2 01
39. Mount the two components as close to each other as possible with cables kept as short as possible not exceeding 15 75 see Fig 2 17 See Table 2 15 for recommended filters Groundin g Zh an ui Metal plate eT F7 Drive Filter Cable length Maximum of 15 75 Motor cable Length Maximum of 82 feet Grounding Remove varnish or paint i M Fig 2 19 EMC Filter Layout Electrical Installation 2 31 Recommended Filters Table 2 15 Recommended EMC Filters EMC Filter Drive Model Dimensions CIMR F7U Model Number Current Rating inches mm 208 240 Vac 20P4 2 43 5 500 x 13 x 1 875 20P7 FS5972 10 07 10A an 145200246 21 5 2 87 5 500 x 13 x 1 875 22P2 55972 18 07 18A HM Pod db 23P7 3 09 5 500 x 13 x 1 875 25p5 55973 35 07 Ss 14 141 x 330 x 46 6 61 8x 14 x 2 375 27P5 55973 60 07 60 a obs ds 5 60 2011 10 8 9 3125 x 16 x 3 125 2015 FS5973 100 07 100 A 60 2018 2022 9 48 3 5315 x 14 40625 x 7 2030 4 3 90 366 180 13 23 4 750 x 17 750 x 6 6875 2037 FS5973 160 40 160 A 6 130 451 2045 24 25 5 125 24 9 4375 M 5973 240 37 240 ER 1303 610 4 240 2075 42 99 11 81 x 22 20 x 6 30 2090 5973 500 37 500 o G0 x 564 16 2110 480 Vac 40P4 40P7 2 43 5 500 x 13 x 1 8
40. O 14 1 15 16 O 17 See Drive Start Up Procedures Page 4 5 Apply input power to the Drive Set the control method of the drive to Flux Vector Control by pressing the MENU key twice for the Quick Setting menu Press the ENTER key to display 1 02 Control Method Use the UP and DOWN keys and the DATA ENTER key to set this parameter to 3 Flux Vector Ensure the DATA ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive Entry Accepted will briefly appear Set the PG Pulses Rev of the PG Encoder to the correct value In the Quick Setting menu go to parameter F1 01 PG Pulses Rev Use the UP DOWN and RESET keys and the DATA ENTER key to set the encoder PPR Display motor speed monitor U1 05 Motor Speed in the Operation menu Rotate the motor shaft by hand in the forward direction of the machine A low positive speed should be displayed 2 PG X2 PG W2 As the shaft is turned in reverse a low negative speed should be displayed If the speed doesn t change when the motor shaft is rotated check the encoder wiring and connections If the polarity is wrong swap wires terminals 4 and 5 on the PG X2 Set the Drive to Local control Press the MENU key once to display the Operation menu Then press DATA ENTER to display Frequency Reference Press the LOCAL REMOTE key once This puts the Drive in the Local Mode allowing run stop and speed commands by the digital
41. Ratedyoltage 3 phase 200 208 220 230 240Vac 50 60 Hz Rated frequency Rated input current 3 3 8 4 9 8 4 11 5 18 24 37 52 Heavy Duty A Rated input current 4 3 3 5 9 4 13 20 24 37 53 Normal Duty A Allowable voltage 10 15 fluctuation fluctuation D Rears Optional Built in Measures tor for power Pe Pulse Rectifica Not possible Possible Power supply characteristics Control characteristics tion 1 The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Drive s rated output current is appropriate for the motor s rated current A 3 wire phase shifting transformer is required on the power supply for 12 pulse rectification The difference between Heavy Duty ratings and the Normal Duty ratings for the Drive are the rated input and output current overload capacity carrier frequency current limit and maxi mum output frequency Parameter C6 01 must be set to value of 0 for Heavy Duty ratings and 2 for Normal Duty ratings Factory default is Heavy Duty 6 01 0 Horsepower ratings are based on 230V NEC Table 430 150 Specifications C 2 480 Table 2 480 Drive Specifications aie 228 0a Dive Specifications Rated output i bor 13 0 18 0 24 0 30 0 34 0 capacity Horepower 1 Horepower 0 0 5 0 75 75 1 152 3 a
42. Set to the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of rated voltage of motor 2 This value is automatically set during auto tuning 0 0 to 40 0 Motor 2 Leakage Inductance Leakage Inductance 0 00 to 650 00 kW Motor 2 Rated Output Set to the rated power of motor 2 in kilowatts kW Mtr Rated Power This value is automatically set during auto tuning Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters 17 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Factory No Digital Operator Display Setting Open Loop Vector Flux Vector 1 01 Sets stopping method when PG open circuit fault PGO occurs See parameter F1 14 0 Ramp to stop Decelerate to stop using the active deceleration time 1 Coast to stop 2 Fast stop Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in 1 09 Alarm Drive continues operation Operation Selection at PG Open Circuit PGO PG Fdbk Loss Sel Sets the stopping method when an overspeed OS fault occurs See F1 08 and F1 09 0 Ramp to stop Decelerate to stop using the active deceleration time Coast to stop Fast stop Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in 1 09 Alarm Drive continues operation Operation Selection at Over speed OS PG Overspeed Sel Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation DEV fault occurs See F1 10 and F1 11 0 Ramp to stop Decelerate to s
43. TA3 Shield connection terminal 5 Vdc and 12 Vdc cannot be used at the same time Electrical Installation 2 37 m PG W2 terminal specifications for PG W2 given in Table 2 21 Table 2 21 PG W2 Terminal Specifications Terminal Contents Specifications 12 Vdc 5 200 mA max Power supply for Pulse Generator 0 Vdc GND for power supply 1 input terminals Pulse generator 1 input B1 phase input terminals Line driver input RS 422 level input Z1 phase input terminals nm AJ 5 t2 Shield 2 input terminals Pulse generator 2 input B2 phase input terminals Line driver input RS 422 level input N gt Z2 phase input terminals UA Shield connection terminal 1 A phase output terminals j Pulse monitor output Source depends on software parameter Line driver output RS 422 level output B phase output terminals N N Z phase output terminals N N Shield connection terminal N gt 0 Vdc For pulse monitor terminals 17 22 N Electrical Installation 2 38 Wiring Wiring examples provided the following figures for the PG encoder feedback boards B Wiring the PG A2 Wiring examples are provided in the following
44. The following causes are possible There may be resonance between the mechanical system s natural frequency and the carrier frequency This is characterized by the motor running with no noise generation but the machinery vibrates with a high pitched whine To prevent this type of resonance adjust the carrier frequency with parameters C6 02 to C6 05 There may be resonance between the mechanical system s natural frequency and the output frequency of the Drive To prevent this from occurring use the jump frequency function in parameters d3 01 to d3 04 or have the driven motor and load balanced to reduce vibration B Oscillation and hunting occur with control The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine Adjust parameters C4 01 Torque Compensa tion Gain C4 02 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Parameter n1 02 Hunting Prevention Gain C2 01 S curve Characteristic Time at Acceleration Start and C3 02 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time in order Lower the gain parameters and raise the primary delay time parameters B Oscillation and hunting occur with V f w PG control The Speed Control Loop Gain ASR parameter setting C5 01 may be incorrect for the machine Change the gain to a more effective level If the oscillation cannot be eliminated in this way set the Hunting Prevention Selection 1 01 0 disabled Then try re adjusting the gain Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6
45. be used to correct for noise in the torque control d5 02 Time 0 to 100 signal the responsiveness with host controller When oscilla Torq Ref Filter tion occurs during torque control increase the set value Sets the speed limit command method for the torque control mode Speed Limit Selection 1 Limited by the output of the soft starter b1 01 selection and d5 03 he i 102 Speed Limit Sel active acceleration deceleration and s curve settings 2 Limited by d5 04 setting value Sets the speed limit during torque control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency E1 04 45 04 Speed Limit This function is enabled when d5 03 is set to 2 Directions are as 120 to Speed Lmt Value follows 120 run command direction run command opposite direction Speed Limit Bias Sets the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum output 45 05 PA frequency E1 04 Bias is given to the specified speed limit It can 0 to 120 Speed Lmt Bias 5 d P be used to adjust the margin for the speed limit Set the delay time from inputting the multi function input speed torque control change from On to OFF or OFF to ON until the Speed Torque Control control is actually changed This function is enabled when the 0 to d5 06 Switchover Timer multi function input speed torque control change 1 71 1000 Ref Hold Time is set While in the speed torque control switching timer the analog inputs hold the
46. programmed for Overheating of the motor as C1 01 and 1 02 Motor Overheat 1 motor temperature H3 09 or H3 05 measured by the motor Flashing exceeds 1 17V for time L1 05 and L1 03 thermistor 3 thru E1 13 Recheck the motor rated current value E2 01 Ensure the values in L6 02 and 013 Overtorque Detection 1 L6 03 are appropriate Overtorque Det 1 Drive output current gt L6 02 for more than Motor was overloaded i Flashing the time set in L6 03 and L6 01 1 or 2 status to eliminate fault Ensure the values in L6 05 and 014 Overtorque Detection 2 L6 06 are appropriate Overtorque Det 2 Drive output current gt L6 05 for more than Motor was overloaded Flashing the time set in L6 06 and L6 04 1 or 2 status to eliminate fault Overspeed was occurring parameter group 95 teedhack 29 Check the reference circuit and Overspeed Det exceeded the value set in 1 08 foratime The reference was too high reference gain Flashing longer than the setting in F1 09 were not appropriate 1 09 TM Check the input circuit and DC Bus Overvoltage High input voltage at R L1 d hei ithi lt 2 and T L3 reduce the input power to within specifications ov point DC Bus Overvolt Pefault time 15 set too Extend the time in C1 02 Flashing 208 240Vac Trip point is 410Vdc 480Vac Trip point is 820Vdc Detected when the Drive is in a stopped condition E1 01 affects the tri
47. set as a percentage of Frequency Reference Lower B5 27 maximum output frequency 1 04 If frequency reference is 0 0 to Limit 5 0 0 ede below this value actual drive speed will be set to this value This 110 0 Ref Lower Limit parameter applies to all frequency reference sources Determines minimum frequency reference set as a percentage of Master Speed Reference maximum output frequency E1 04 If frequency reference from Lower Limit analog input 1 2 and 3 is below this value actual drive 0 0 A A A A Ref1 Lower Limit speed will be set to this value This parameter applies only to analog inputs Al A2 and A3 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 12 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Doserptiah Range Setting n Flux Vector Vector E Jump Frequencies M Jump Freq 1 These parameters allow programming of up to three prohibited frequency reference points for eliminating problems with resonant d3 02 Jump ao 2 vibration of the motor machine This feature does not actually 0 0Hz Jump Freq eliminate the selected frequency values but will accelerate and Jump Frequency 3 decelerate the motor through the prohibited bandwidth d3 03 Jump Freq 3 This parameter determines the width of the deadband around each sel
48. 0 00Hz A Reference 13 erence 3 4 is Setting units are affected by 01 03 A A A Frequency Reference 14 equency reference when multi function input Multi step speed 0 00H A A Reference 14 erence 1 3 4 is Setting units are affected by 01 03 2 Frequency Reference 15 equency reference when multi function input Multi step speed 0 00Hz A A A A Reference 15 erence 2 3 4 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 Frequency Reference 16 equency reference when multi function input Multi step speed 0 00Hz A A A A Reference 16 erence 1 2 3 4 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 Frequency reference when frequency reference is selected via multi function input ter Jog Frequency Reference minals Jog frequency reference has priority over multi step 6 00Hz Jog Reference speed reference 1 to 4 D1 17 is also the reference for the JOG key on the digital operator and the multi function inputs forward jog and reverse jog Setting units are affected by 01 03 Reference Limits Fieduency Reference Upper Determines maximum frequency reference set as a percentage of req y maximum output frequency E1 04 If the frequency reference is 0 0 to Limit 5 ae 100 096 A A A A above this value actual drive speed will be limited to this value 110 0 Ref Upper Limit 7 2 This parameter applies to all frequency reference sources Determines minimum frequency reference
49. 0 1 96 Motor Secondary Current I q Mot SEC Current Current being used by the motor to produce torque 14 0 1 Motor Excitation Current 14 i Mot EXC Current Current being used by the motor for excitation 14 0 1 96 Output Frequency After Soft Start Frequency reference speed command after the accel and 01 20 0 01 Hz SFS Output decel ramps and s curve 01 21 ASR Input Input error to the speed control loop ASR 0 01 8 ASR Input The maximum output frequency E1 04 corresponds to 100 gis 01 22 ASR Output Output from the speed control loop ASR 0 01 ASR Output The motor rated secondary current corresponds to 100 5 9 PI Feedback Value 3 PID Feedback Feedback signal level when PID control is used 0 01 Reference value from a DI 16H2 Digital Reference Card The value will be displayed in binary or BCD depending on Set by F3 01 user constant F3 01 Vols CR VQ ence Internal voltage reference for motor secondary current control Vols OR E Internal voltage reference for motor excitation current control 28 32 Cumulative Operation Time 7 3 Elapsed Time Total operating or power on time of the Drive No Ul U1 14 U1 15 U1 16 U1 17 DI 16H2 Input Status Ube DI 16 Reference U Accumulated kilowatt hours 0 1 kWh kWh Lo 4 Digits ccumulated kilowatt hours i MWh U1 30 kWh Hi 5 Digits Accumulated megawatt hours 1 MWh ACR output of q axis ACR q Output Current co
50. 03 n 2 3 72 Hz 60 Hz Base 4 50 Hz VT1 5 50 Hz 2 6 60 Hz VTI 7 60 2 2 8 50 Hz HST1 9 50 Hz HST2 A 60 Hz HST1 B 60 Hz HST2 C 90 Hz 60Hz Base D 120 Hz 60Hz Base E 180 Hz 60Hz Base F Custom V F FF Custom w o limit the setting for E1 08 will be disregarded Always ensure that the ND2 40 0 four frequencies are set in the following manner to 400 0 1 04 2 E1 12 2 E1 06 gt E1 07 gt E1 09 E2 04 is automatically set during auto tuning 01025540 E1 05 Maximum Output Voltage 240V Max Voltage 0 to 510 0 480V Output voltage V Base Frequency 0 0 to 200 0 E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency Min Frequency 0 to 255 0 Base Voltage 240V Base Voltage 0 to 510 0 90 e A 480V E2 01 Motor Rated Current kVA kVA Motor Rated FLA Dependant Dependant 5 1 09 1 07 1 06 1 11 1 04 E2 04 Number of Motor Poles 21048 4 Number of Poles Frequency Hz kVA EH Motor Rated Output Set to the motor rated power in KW 0 00 to Depen Motor Rated Power This value is automatically set during auto tuning 650 00 dant t PG Parameter Sets the number of pulses per revolution of the encoder pulse gen PLO PG Pulse Rev erator This value is automatically set during auto tuning 0060000 10s Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running These parameters are only applicable when V F Pattern Selection HD 40 0 Maximum Output Ereduen is set to
51. 15 Digital Operator Copy Function Faults Fate teret 6 17 TFOUBIGS OO ME C 6 18 Main Circuit Test Procedure ore eite 6 26 Drive Date Stamp Information beue E ue de teu UU eee 6 29 Table of Contents viii 7 7 1 Periodic INSDOCHOM Pete MICE 7 2 Preventative Maintenance et HI BR e arua RN RR ER RR Ix 7 3 Periodic Maintenance of Paris otto desert lev eoru Poe 7 4 Heatsink Cooling Fan 22 7 5 Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card 7 7 Appendix oae eec eee ne do aba Rand A 1 F7 Parameter eie A 3 FEAMONHOr BI A 40 Fault Trace utet ERR te tene hen E ESO ER ence Maen Dong 43 EZ Traces oto o cof A 43 Appendix B Capacity Related B 1 Drive Capacity Selection 244 1144440000 0 nnne B 2 Parameters Affected by Drive Capacity Setting 3 App ndikx C SpecificatiONS 1 Standard Drive Specifications Gk Pn nedum A Fei Ea e
52. 15VDC 10 20m A Q Q Q Q Q Q S6 Q Q Q SN Q Q Q V 15VDC 10 20m A 14 01 Q Al 0 to 10VDC 20 k Q 14 04 AM A2 4 to 20mA 250 0 to 10VDC 20kQ Multi function Anabg hput 1 13 09 0 to 10VDC 20k Multi function Anabg hput 2 13 05 Q RP 0 to 32kHz 5 to 12VDC Multi function Pulse hput 16 01 16 06 MP Q AC Tem natng Resistor 100 51 om 11 Bit Resolution 0 2 Accuracy 11 Bit Resolution 0 2 Accuracy 5 Accuracy Fig 2 17 Field Wiring Diagram Electrical Installation 2 29 Electromagnetic Compatibility Introduction This section describes the measures necessary to comply with the EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility Directive The manual s installation and wiring instructions must be followed for compliance Yaskawa products are tested by authorized organizations using the standards listed below Product standard EN 61800 3 1996 EN 61000 3 2 Al A2 14 2000 Measures to Ensure Conformity of Installed Yaskawa Drives to EMC Directive Yaskawa Drives are not required to be installed in a switch cabinet It is not possible to give detailed instructions for all possible types of installations therefore this manual provides general guidelines All electrical equipment produces radio and line borne interf
53. 2 to 6 C6 01 1 and C6 02 7 to E EEPROM Write Error The NV RAM data does not match the EEPROM data Cause The following settings have been made at the same time B5 01 PID Control Mode Selection has been set to a value other than 0 B5 15 PID Sleep Function Operation Level has been set to a value other than 0 B1 03 Stopping Method Selection was set to 2 or 3 V f parameter settings were out of range Parameter setting was incorrect Power supply is turned OFF Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 14 Corrective Action Check parameters B5 01 B5 15 and B1 03 and correct the error Check parameters E1 04 E1 11 A minimum frequency voltage value may be set higher than the maximum frequency voltage Check the parameter settings and correct the errors Cycle power to the Drive Do a factory initialization A1 03 Auto Tuning Faults Auto tuning faults are shown below When the following faults are detected the fault is displayed on the digital operator and the motor coasts to a stop No fault or alarm outputs will occur Table 6 4 Auto Tuning Fault Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display Motor Data Fault STOP Key Input Line to Line Resistance Fault No Load Current Fault Rated Slip Fault Er 02 Minor Fault Er 03 STOP key Er 04 Resistance Er 05 No Load Current Er 08 Rated Slip Acceleration Fault Detected only for rotational auto tunin
54. 240Vac Drive Specifications 20P4 20 7 21P5 2 2 23P7 25 5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055 2075 2090 2110 Rated output MA 1 2 1 6 2 7 37 5 7 8 8 12 0 17 0 22 0 27 0 32 0 44 0 55 0 69 0 82 0 110 0 130 0 160 0 capacity Horsepower 4 0 5 0 75 1 1 5 2 5 7 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 100 125 150 Rated output As eon 0 15 0 23 0 31 0 45 0 58 0 71 85 0 115 0 145 0 180 0 215 283 0 346 0 415 0 current A Overload capacity 150 of rated output current for 60 seconds 150 of rated output current 3 3 Heavy Duty Carrier frequency 2kHz Maximum output 300 0 Hz frequency Rated output e 1 4 1 8 3 4 1 6 4 8 8 12 0 18 0 23 0 29 0 34 0 44 0 62 0 73 0 82 0 120 0 140 0 160 0 capacity 23 0 Rated output P 3 6 4 6 7 8 10 8 16 8 31 0 46 2 59 4 74 8 88 0 115 0 162 0 192 0 215 312 0 360 0 415 0 current A Overload capacity 96 of rated output 107 107 108 107 107 120 102 117 117 114 116 120 107 113 120 109 115 1X current for 60 sec 120 of rated output current 3 Carrier frequeticy 10 10 10 10 15 15 10 10 10 10 5 5 2 2 2 kHz Maximum output 400 0 Hz frequency Output ratings Normal Duty Maximum output 3 phase 200 208 220 230 or 240 Vac voltage Proportional to input voltage
55. 3 Phase PowerSuppy L2 de 8 12 50 60Hz INI P L3 7 v T3 Foward Run S top ENS e 51 D 1 hputs 1 2 R 9 C Versi S tc 24VDC 8mA ND everse Run S top 58 PE 53 11 01 MB D igital0 utput 1 e Fault Contact 54 1 02 250VAC 30VDC 1A 0 Multi function e S5 11 03 D gital hputs 3 8 lt 24VDC 8mA e S6 11 04 M1 A 57 1 05 2 01 421 88 01 00 5 M ulti finctbn SN 12 02 M4 D gital0 utputs 2 4 Q 250VAC 30VDC 1A Q SC ni M5 A QD SP 24VDC 12 03 M6 A EG La gt EG A SV 1 10 20m 7 Multi function eV 52 C 10 2 14 01 FM EN Anabg Outputs 1 2 V I5VDC 10 20m A 0 to 10VDC 2mA x 4 Al 0 to 10VDC 20 k femme 4 20m A 500 Q 1 x 14 04 AM N 9 B it Resolutin Frequency lt 8 Accuracy oft IE Q A2 4 to 20mA 250 Q non 0 to L0VDC 20kQ s 46 06 MP n Multifunction Multifunction Anabg hput 1 13 09 Puke Output 0 to 10VDC 20k ea a Multi function Anabg Input 2 13 05 ACO 2 5 RP 0 to 32kHz 5 to 12VDC LJ Multifunction Puke hput 16 01 AC YL Tem natng Resis
56. 3102 G8 4 30 38 U T1 V T2 W T3 30 806 Application ue ms celo 4 4 sd Q2 Q2 1 0 0 30 to 50 2 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 22 Dependent AN 79 2 to 87 97 4to2 4 R LI S L2 T L3 C U TI 79 2 to 87 97 1 to 1 0 1 0 V T2 W T3 RULI1 11 21 TI L31 9 0 to 10 0 50 to 60 60 35 2 to 43 99 Application 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 22 Dependent 79 2 to 87 97 4to2 4 i Electrical Installation 2 3 Table 2 1 208 240 Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications Continued Clamping Wire Size Recommended Terminal Torque Range AWG Wire Size AWG Screws Ib in Nem R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 154 8 to 197 9 V T2 W T3 RULI1 S1 L21 TI L31 17 6 to 22 5 D 77 4 to 95 0 2037 93 8 8 to 10 8 Drive Model CIMR F7U Terminal Symbol Application Dependent 2 38 111 912 1 512 T L3 1 SUL21 T1 L31 154 8 to 1979 MIO 476 to 22 5 U T1 V T2 W T3 77 4 to 95 0 x 154 8 to 197 9 17 6 to 22 5 114 to 12 3 wh 912 1 3 to 1 4 R LI 812 T L3 91 U T1 V T2 W T3 154 8 to 197 9 RI L11 SI L21 TI L31 17 6 to 22 5 77 4 to 95 0 2055 993 8 8 to 10 8 17 6 to 22 5 11 4 to 12 3 1 3 to 1 4 1 25 300 150 250 125 Application Dependent 1 50 1 25 1 0 X 2P 60 X 2P Application Dependent 1111 912 17 6 to 22 5 60 114 to 12 3 1 3 to 1 4 1 25 71 8 8 to 10 8 Dependent 31 4 t
57. 4 Terminal S6 is ON Multi function input 5 Terminal S7 is ON Multi function input 6 Terminal S8 is ON Output terminal status 000000 Multi function Contact 1 output 1 Terminal 1 2 8 Multi function Contact 2 Output Terminal Status output 1 Terminal 3 4 Output Term Sts is ON Multi function contact out put 3 Terminal M5 M6 is ON Not used Fault output Terminal MA AB MC is Parameters A 40 Table 2 F7 Monitor List Continued Parameter Parameter Name ar Digital Operator Display Description Display Units Internal Drive status 000000 During running During zero speed 1 During reverse During reset signal input 01 12 Cie Status During speed agree 1 Drive operation ready During fault detection Minor fault 1 During fault detection Major fault Software Number La T FLASH ID Last 5 digits of the Drive s software number Terminal A1 Input Voltage Term 1 Level Input voltage on Terminal A1 as a percentage of 10V DC 0 1 Terminal A2 Input Voltage Displays the input current or voltage on Terminal A2 as a 0 1 Term A2 level percentage of 10 Vdc SR Terminal A3 Input Voltage 5 a as wn Term A3 level Input voltage on Terminal as a percentage of 10 Vdc
58. 4 Frequency detection 1 Output frequency lt L4 01 1 Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 Output frequency gt 14 01 1 Bit 6 Drive startup completed Startup completed 1 Bit 7 Low voltage detection Detected 1 Bit 8 Baseblock Drive output baseblock 1 Bit 9 Frequency reference mode Not communication 1 Communication 0 Bit A Run command mode Not communication 1 Communication 0 Bit B Overtorque detection Detected 1 Bit C Frequency reference lost Lost 1 Bit D Retrying error Retrying 1 Bit E Error including Modbus communications time out Error occurred 1 Bit F Modbus communications time out Timed out 0 Multi function digital output status Bit 0 Multi function digital output 1 terminal M1 M2 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 1 Multi function digital output 2 terminal M3 M4 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 2 Multi function digital output 3 terminal M5 M6 ON 1 OFF 0 Bits 3 to F Not used 002 0030H Not used 0031H Main circuit DC voltage 0032H 0037H Not used 0038H PID feedback level Input equivalent to 100 Max output frequency 10 1 without sign 0039H PID input level 100 Max output frequency 10 1 with sign 003AH PID output level 100 Max output frequency 10 1 with sign 003BH CPU software number 003CH Flash software number Communication error details Bit 0 CRC error Bit 1 Invalid data length Bit 2 Not used
59. 6 2 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Perform a factory initialization CPF05 External A D Converter Fault INO DE spike Was Cycle power to the Drive External A D Err control circuit input terminals Replace the control board The option board was not Turn off the power and reinstall connected properly the option board Option Board Connection Error Option Error The Drive or option board was Replace the option board or the damaged Drive ASIC Internal RAM Fault RAM Err Control circuit damage Replace the Drive Watchdog Timer Fault WAT Err Control circuit damage Replace the Drive CPU Err CPU ASIC Mutual Diagnosis Fault Control circuit damage circuit Control circuit damage Replace the Drive Replace the Drive Drive REI ae ASIC Version Fault Control circuit damage Replace the Drive Remove all M to the option M Perform a factory initialization cere Option Card Fault Option A D Error Cycle power to the Drive Option card A D convert fault Replace the option board Replace the control board Perform a factory initialization CPF21 Noise or spike was on the Cycle power to the Drive Option CPU D Self diagnosis Fault of Option Board communication line and or ption CPU Down defective option board Replace the option board Replace the control board Remove any
60. BE SET TO VALUE OF 0 FOR HEAVY DUTY AND 2 FOR NORMAL DUTY 2 FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING IS HEAVY DUTY C6 01 0 In In 3 o H o e T ru VAL E AIR 2 w e TI 3 E SS SSS RATED DIMENSIONS IN INCHES APPROX RATED MODEL OUTPUT NOM iint INPUT CIMR F7U CURRENT HP MOUNTING 085 HD ND2 AMPS HD ND2 Hi Wi H w H2 w2 D 01 bx 2037 145 162 40 50 50 2264 984 2362 1476 049 246 1181 394 3 8 125 2045 180 192 60 60 2264 984 2362 1476 049 246 1299 512 3 8 139 2055 215 215 75 75 2756 1280 2854 1772 049 246 1378 512 3 8 189 2075 283 312 100 100 2756 1280 2854 1772 049 246 1378 512 3 8 191 2090 346 360 125 125 3228 1457 3346 1969 059 256 1417 512 3 8 238 2110 415 415 150 150 3366 1752 3484 2264 059 256 1488 551 3 8 330 2037 145 162 50 50 60 2264 984 2362 1476 049 246 1181 394 3 8 125 2045 180 192 60 75 2264 984 2362 1476 049 246 1299 512 3 8 139 2055 215 215 75 2756 1280 2854 1772 049 246 1378 512 3 8 189 2075 283 312 100 100 125 2756 1280 2854 1772 049 246 1378 512 3 8 191 2090 346 360 125 150 3228 1457 3346 1969 059 256 1417 512 3 8 238 4075 150 156 100 125 2756 1280 2854 1772 049 246 1378 512 3 8 194 dei 4090 180 180 125 150 150 2756 1280 2854 1772 049 246 1378 512 3 8 196 4110 216 240 NA 200 3228 1457 3346 196
61. Do not use the PG X2 s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in parameter F1 05 PG Rotation The factory preset is for motor for ward rotation A phase advancement Fig 2 25 PG X2 Wiring Electrical Installation 2 41 Wiring the PG W2 Wiring examples are provided in Fig 2 26 for the PG W2 2 id Pulse Ly P TP5 7 Pulse Pulse Pulse A Pulse B Monitor Pulse B Outputs Pulse Z Notes Ground wire Power supply for PG 1 from PG W2 JN PG 2 requires external power supply Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for signal lines Do not use the PG W2 s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters Do not use PG W2 to supply both PG units Fig 2 26 PG W2 Wiring Electric
62. MENU key repeatedly to scroll between the menu selections Press the DATA ENTER key to enter the desired menu selection MENU DRIVE Main Menu Operation QUICK Main Menu Quick Setting ADV Main Menu Programming VERI FY Main Menu Modified Consts A TUNE Main Menu Auto Tuning Fig 3 2 Main Menu Structure Digital Operator 3 7 Operation Menu DRIVE This menu is used for setting the frequency reference Local Mode or monitoring values such as output frequency and output current It is also used for displaying the fault history and the fault traces The Drive must be in this menu in order to run See parameter b1 08 Run Command Selection During Program U1 Monitor List Follow the key operations below Fig 3 3 to access the Operation Menu DRIVE DRIVE Rdy Frequency Ref Main Menu ui Operation U1 03 Fig 3 3 U1 Monitor List Access Procedure Use and keys to scroll through the U1 Monitor parameter list See Appendix A for functional description U1 03 _ Output Current 01 05 Motor Speed UL06 Output Voltage UL30 kWh Upper 5 digits 01 10 Input Terminal Status Note Some monitors are not available for all Control Methods 1 02 Digital Operator 3 8 U2 Fault Trace List After viewing the Monitor parameter list follow the key
63. Models CIMR F7U20PA thru 2018 and 40 4 thru 4018 Physical Installation 1 16 2 Electrical Installation This chapter describes wiring terminals main circuit terminal connections main circuit terminal wiring specifications control circuit terminals and control circuit wiring specifications Terminal Block Configuration 2 2 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals esses 2 3 Control MIFIT 2 21 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC 2 30 Installing and Wiring Option Boards 2 34 Electrical Installation 2 1 Terminal Block Configuration The wiring terminals are shown in Fig 2 1 Fig 2 2 and Fig 2 3 Control circuit terminals See Figure 2 3 Ground terminal Control circuit terminals See Figure 2 3 Main circuit terminals Ground terminal _ _ _ FEE Main circuit terminals om Charge indicator Ground terminal Charge indicator O Ground terminal Fig 2 2 Terminal Configuration for Models CIMR F7U2022 4030 and larger sN SC sP A2 V
64. Overload L3 C3 Motor Slip Compensation L2 Power Loss Ridethru Stall Prevention 1 5 Tuning L4 Reference Detection C6 Carrier Frequency Fault Restart dl Preset Reference 3 L L6 Torque Detection L L nl M Hunting Prevention n2 Tuning n3 High Slip Braking F2 AI 14 Setup 5 7 Torque Detection 8 Hardware Protection C4 Torque Compensation Digital Operator 3 12 Modified Constants Menu VERIFY This menu is used to set read the parameters that have been modified from their original factory default settings Follow the key operations below Fig 3 8 to access the Modified Constants Parameter Menu VERIFY Main Menu See Note 1 Modified Consts Fig 3 8 Modified Constants Menu Access Procedure Note 1 If there are no parameters that have been modified from their original factory default settings then the display will state None Modified Otherwise use and keys to scroll through the Modified Constants list Auto Tuning Menu A TUNE This menu is used to Auto Tune the Drive in order to calculate the required motor parameters to optimize motor performance Ideally perform Auto Tuning with the motor uncoupled from the load When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load perform static or terminal resistance Auto Tuning To set motor param eters by hand calculation contact your Yaskawa representative Follow the key operations below Fig 3 9 to
65. Processing continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Remove the motor and run the Drive without the motor Output Ground Fault Motor lead was shorted to Check the motor for a phase to GF Drive output grounding current has dand or a DCCT dsh rt Ground Fault exceeded 50 of the Drive rated output s Tm PUB current and L8 09 1 enabled Check the output current with a clamp on meter to verify the DCCT reading There was a broken wire in the output cable There was a broken wire in the motor winding Output Open phase The output terminals were Check the wiring to the motor Check the motor for phase to ground short An open phase occurred at the Drive output loose LF Output Phase Loss This fault is detected when output current The motor being used has a has exceeded 5 imbalance and L8 07 1 capacity less than 5 of the Check the motor and Drive enabled Drive s maximum motor capacity capacity Low pedance motor was Add additional impedance used Remove the motor and run the Shorted Drive output phase to Drive without the motor phase shorted motor locked Check the motor for a phase to rotor load too heavy accel hase shori S ded th decel time too short contactor P on the Drive output is opened Check the Drive for phase to Over Current overcurrent detection level approximately or closed a special motor phase short
66. Run and Stop respectively The multi function digital input that was set to 0 will function as a Forward Reverse input for the Drive When the Forward Reverse input is open the Drive will run in the Forward direction and when the input is closed the Drive will run in the Reverse direction 3 wire operation a momentary closure gt 50mS between 51 and SN will cause the Drive to run provided that S2 and SN is held closed The Drive will stop any time the S2 SN connection is broken If the 3 wire configuration is implemented via 3 wire Initialization A1 0323330 terminal 3 becomes the Forward Reverse input Basic Programming 5 4 Run Command Run on momentary Close o Stop Command Stop on momentary Open Fig 5 2 3 Wire Control To issue a run command via Modbus serial communication Set b1 02 2 Modbus communication and connect the Modbus RS 485 422 serial communication cable to R R S and S the removable terminal block Make sure the 51 1 switch and the Modbus H5 parameters are properly set To issue the RUN command via an option card Set b1 02 3 and install an option board into the 2CN port on the control board Consult the manual supplied with the option board for instructions on integrating the Drive and communication option board IMPORTANT If b1 01 3 but an option board is not installed 2CN 5 operator programming error will be displayed on the digital operator and the Drive will not
67. Stop lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 until the fault no longer occurs 3 Coast to Stop with Timer When the run command is removed the Drive will turn off its output transistors and the motor will coast to a stop If a run command is input before the timer expires the Drive will not run and the run command will be ignored The timer value is determined by the active deceleration time and the output frequency when the run command is removed Run Command A Deceleration OFF Time Timer Value 100 Minimum Baseblock Output Frequency Time L2 03 Minimum 100 Maximum 0 96 Output Output Frequency gt Frequency Timer Value Output Frequency at Stop Command Input Fig 5 6 Coast to Stop with Timer Basic Programming 5 7 Accel Decel Time 1 01 Acceleration Time 1 B C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 Setting Range 0 0 to 6000 0 Factory Default 10 0sec C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum output frequency 1 04 C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 sets the time to decelerate from maximum output frequency to zero C1 01 and C1 02 are the factory default active accel decel settings Alternate accel decel settings C1 03 and C1 08 can be activated by multi function digital inputs H1 00 7 and 1A or specified by the switch over frequency C1 11 See Figure 5 7 below 1 11 Output Frequency gt
68. Table 2 13 Jumper 15 Multi function Analog Output Output Range V 0 to 10V or 10V to 10V default I 4 to 20mA V 0 to 10V or 10V to 10V default I 4 to 20mA Electrical Installation 2 25 Sinking Sourcing Mode The multi function digital input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode OV common and sourcing mode 24V common by using the terminals SN SC and SP An external power supply can also be connected providing more freedom in signal input methods Table 2 14 Sinking Sourcing Mode and Input Signals Internal Power Supply Sinking Mode External Power Supply Sinking Mode 51 yA s va e Le pi 7 o o 1 S SN sc sc e 1 24 24V P24V 24V cae External 24V p Factory Default Internal Power Supply Sourcing Mode External Power Supply Sourcing Mode ps ur i 451 52 Y4 2 VN External 24 LN 5 1 24 24V 24 24 5 5 lt 4 1 Electrical Installation 2 26 Terminal Connections Connections to Drive terminals are shown in Fig 2 15 DC Reactor S tandard C MR F7U 2022 to 2110 C MR F7U 4030 to 4300 U X Shorting Bar S tandard CMR F7U20P4 to 2018 7040 4 to 4018 3 Motor Ej vL
69. Vector Setting Range Factory Setting Flux Vector 0 0 to 110 0 to 0 0 A A A A 110 0 0 0 to 110 0 10 110 0 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name nas Setting No Digital Operator Display Description Range ba a Serial Communications Setup Selects drive station node number address for Modbus terminals Drive Node Address 3 5 01 4 5 S Drive s power must be cycled for the setting to Serial Comm Adr take effect Selects the baud rate for Modbus terminals R R S and S The Drive s power must be cycled for the setting to take effect Communication Speed 0 1200 bps 5 02 Selection 1 2400 bps Serial Baud Rate 2 4800 bps 3 9600 bps 4 19200 bps Selects the communication parity for Modbus terminals R R S ere S Drive s power must be cycled for the setting to take Communication Parity 5 03 Selection effect Serial Com Sel ONS Parity 1 Even Parity 2 Odd Parity Selects the stopping method when a communication timeout fault CE is detected Stopping Method After 0 Ramp to Stop 5 04 Communication Error 1 Coast to Stop Serial Fault Sel 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only 4 Run at D1 04 Enables or disables the communications timeout fault CE Communication Fault 0 Disabled A communication loss will not cause a communica 5 05 Detection Selection tion fault Serial Dtct 1 Enabled If communication
70. a percentage of L6 02 Drive rated current torque for torque detection 1 Current for 0 to 300 15 A A A A A1 02 0 or 1 Torque for A1 02 2 or 3 Torque Detection Time 1 Sets the length of time an overtorque undertorque condition must 0 0 to 16205 Torq Det 1 Time exist before torque detection 1 recognized by the drive 10 0 nae A A Determines the drive s response to an overtorque undertorque condition Overtorque and Undertorque are determined by the settings in parameters L6 05 and L6 06 The multi function output settings 18 and 19 in the H2 parameter group are also active if programmed 0 Disabled OL4 at Speed Agree Alarm Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Operation continues after detection OL4 at RUN Alarm Overtorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection OL4 at SpeedAgree Fault Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault OL4 at RUN Fault Overtorque Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault UL4 at SpeedAgree Alarm Undertorque Detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation continues after detec tion UL4 at RUN Alarm Undertorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection UL4 at Speed Agree Fault Undertorque Detection only active du
71. at the output 180 of Drive rated output current motor with a FLA rating larger Verify C1 01 and 02 are set than Drive rated output cur correctly rent Check load conditions The ambient temperature was Check for dirt build up on the too high fi d heatsink Heatsink Overheat ee DUUM UM The temperature of the Drive s heatsink There was a heat source Reduce the ambient temperature OH exceeded the setting in L8 02 and L8 03 20 nearby around the Drive to 2 Heatsink Overtemp 9 The Drive s cooling fan s stopped Replace the cooling fan Drive s internal cooling fan stopped The Drive s internal cooling F7U2018 F7U4018 and larger fan s stopped The ambient temperature was Check for dirt build up on the too high fans and heatsink Heatsink Overticat X There was heat source Reduce the ambient temperature The temperature of the Drive s heatsink ibd th Drive OH1 exceeded 105 degrees C i Drive s cooling fan s stopped Replace the cooling fan Drive s internal cooling fan stopped The Drive s internal cooling F7U2011 F7U4011 and larger capacities fan s stopped Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 5 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load Motor Overheating Recheck the accel decel time Detected when A2 o
72. capacity carrier frequency current limit and maximum output frequency Parameter C6 01 must be set to value of 0 for Heavy Duty ratings and 2 for Normal Duty ratings Factory default is Heavy Duty 6 01 0 Horsepower ratings are based on 230V NEC Table 430 150 Specifications C 4 Common Specifications The following specifications apply to both 208 240Vac and 480Vac Class Drives Table C 3 Common F7 Drive Specifications Model Number Specification CIMR F7U 5 Control Characteristics Control method Sine wave PWM V f control V f control with PG Open Loop Vector control Flux Vector Control Speed control range 200 1 1000 1 with PG Speed control accuracy 0 2 0 02 with PG 77 F 50 F 25 C 10 C Speed response 5Hz 30Hz with PG Torque limit Can be set by parameter analog input or serial communication 4 quadrant control Torque accuracy 5 Torque response 20Hz 40Hz with PG Frequency control range 0 01 to 400 00 Hz Frequency accuracy temperature characteristics Digital references 0 01 14 F to 104 F 10 C to 40 C Analog references 0 1 77 F 50 F 25 C 10 C Frequency setting resolution Digital references 0 01 Hz Analog references 0 03 60 Hz 10 bit with sign Output frequency resolution 0 01Hz Analog setting signal 10 to 10Vdc 0 to 10Vdc 4 to 20mA Acceleration De
73. contacts will turn ON below L4 01 There is hysteresis in the frequency detection 2 function 1 a frequency detection width L4 02 2 0 Hz Change the set ting to approximately 0 5 Hz if there is a load droop during stop Do not use the multi function contact output run signal H2 01 0 for the brake ON OFF signal Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 21 If the Motor Overheats The following causes are possible The load is too large If the motor load is too large and the torque exceeds the motor s rated torque the motor may overheat Reduce the load amount by either reducing the load or increasing the acceleration deceleration times Also consider increasing the motor size BThe ambient temperature is too high The motor rating is determined by a particular ambient operating temperature range The motor will overheat if it is run con tinuously at the rated torque in an environment where the maximum ambient operating temperature rating is exceeded Lower the motor s ambient temperature to within its acceptable range BAuto tuning has not been performed for Vector Control Vector Control may not perform efficiently if auto tuning has not been performed Perform auto tuning or set the motor parameters through hand calculations Alernatively change the Control Mode Selection A1 02 to V F Control 0 or 1 If Peripheral Devices Like PLCs or Others are Influenced by Starting or Running Drive The follo
74. control method of the drive to Open Loop Vector Control by pressing the MENU key twice for the Quick Set ting menu Press the ENTER key to display 1 02 Control Method Use the UP and DOWN keys and the DATA ENTER key to set this parameter to 2 Open Loop Vector Ensure the DATA ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive Entry Accepted will briefly appear Set the Drive to Local control Press the MENU key once to display the Operation menu Then press DATA ENTER to display Frequency Reference Press the LOCAL REMOTE key once This puts the Drive in the Local Mode allowing run stop and speed commands by the digital operator The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off The FWD light turns on WARNING THE NEXT KEY PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO ROTATE TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS Check the motor rotation Press and hold the JOG key to check motor rotation The RUN light turns on and the STOP light is off Frequency Ref U1 01 now displays 6 00Hz on the Digital Operator The frequency reference for this operation comes from parameter 41 17 Jog Reference with a factory default setting of 6 00Hz The motor should ramp up to speed If the motor rotation is incorrect swap any two motor leads U T1 V T2 W T3 on the Drive terminal and repeat the motor rotation check Proceed to the Auto Tuning section StartUp 4 8 Flux Vector Startup 1 8 O 9 O 10 Oil O 12 O 13
75. crc 0 crc 1 0xa001 the shifted value with 0xa001 else if pre shifted value bit 0 is not set crc 0 1 set the pre shifted value equal to the shifted value crc 0 unsigned 0 256 amp 0 004 Hi byte crc 1 unsigned 0 amp OxOOff II Lo byte return Response Message The Drive disregards the comand message and does not return the response message in the following case 1 In simultaneous broadcasting of data slave address field is 0 all slaves execute but do not respond 2 When a communication error over run framing parity or CRC 16 is detected in the command message 3 When the slave address in the command message does not coincide with the address set in the slave 4 When the command message data length is not proper Communications 0 7 Modbus Function Code Details Reading Holding Register Contents 03H Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities The addresses must be consecutive starting from a specified address The data content of the storage register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits The following table shows message examples when reading status signals error details data link status and frequency references from the slave 2 Drive Response Message Command Message During Normal Operation Response Message During Error
76. drive in the position Failure to follow these installation steps may cause equipment damage or personal injury Preliminary Procedures 1 Disconnect all electrical power to the drive 2 Remove drive front cover 3 Use a voltmeter to verify that voltage is disconnected from incoming power terminals and that the DC bus has dissipated Heat Sink Mount Resistor Installation Remove the drive from its mounting for access to the rear of the heat sink 2 Attach the Heat Sink Mount Resistor on the back of the drive s heat sink with screws M4 x 10mm 0 7 mm pitch as shown in figure below Remove the rubber plug and run the braking resistor wires into the hole that leads to the terminal block 3 4 Reinstall the drive in its mounting position 5 Connect the leads from the Heat Sink Mount Resistor to the drive terminals B1 and B2 6 Proceed to Adjustments section on following page HEAT SINK MOUNT RESISTOR DR TO Fig 2 7 Attaching Heat Sink Mount Resistor on Heat Sink Electrical Installation 2 15 Remote Mount Resistor Unit Installation for F7U20P4 thru F7U2018 and F7U40P4 thru F7U4018 Since the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generates heat during dynamic braking operation install it in a location away from other equipment 1 Attach the Remote Mount Resistor Unit maintaining a minimum 1 97 inches 50 mm clearance on each side and a mini mum 7 87 inches 200 mm clearan
77. figures for the PG A2 Drive T Branch O Ru Circuit V T2 V T Protection WIT3 WTO 12 V power supply 0 V power supply 12 V voltage input A phase Pulse 0 V Pulse monitor output Branch Circuit Protection W T3 12 V power supply 0 V power supply V N g Open collector input A phase ot Pulse 0 V d 9 Pulse monitor output gt Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for signal lines Do not use the PG A2 s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters Fig 2 22 Wiring an Open collector Input Electrical Installation 2 39 Wiring the PG B2 Wiring examples are provided in Fig 2 23 for the PG B2 Drive Branch um Oo Circuit O s2 vm Protection Power supply 12 V Power supply 0 V A phase pulse monitor output B phase pulse monitor output Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for signal lines Do not use the PG B2 s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfuncti
78. is lost for more than 2 seconds a CE fault will occur 5 06 Drive Transmit Wait Time Set the delay time from when the drive receives data to when the Transmit WaitTIM drive sends data RTS Control Selection Enables or disables request to send RTS control H5 07 RTS Control Sel 0 Disabled RTS is always on 1 Enabled RTS turns on only when sending Pulse I O Setup Pulse Train Input Function Selects the function of pulse train terminal RP 0 Frequency reference H6 01 Selection Pulse Input Sel 1 PID feedback value v pu 2 PID setpoint value H6 02 Pulse Train Input Scaling Sets the number of pulses in hertz that is equal to the maximum 1000 to Pulse In Scaling output frequency E1 04 32000 H6 03 Pulse Train Input Gain Sets the output level when the pulse train input is at 10096 asa 0 0 to Pulse Input Gain percentage of maximum output frequency 1 04 1000 0 Control Method Factory Setting A 6 04 Pulse Train Input Bias Sets the output level when the pulse train input is OHz as a 100 0 to 0 0 Pulse Input Bias percentage of maximum output frequency E1 04 100 0 aude A A A H6 05 False Tran Input iler Time Sets the pulse train input filter time constant in seconds ANS Pulse In Filter P 3 2 00 Pulse Monitor Sel monitors TUE Sets the number of output pulses when the monitor is 100 Pulse Train Monitor Scaling Hz Set H6 06 to 2 and H6 07 to 0 to make th
79. operator The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off and the FWD light turns on Display monitor U1 01 Frequency Ref in the Operation menu WARNING THE NEXT KEY PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO ROTATE TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS Check the motor rotation Press and hold the JOG key to check motor rotation The RUN light turns on and the STOP light is off U1 01 Frequency Ref displays 6 00Hz on the Digital Operator The frequency reference for this operation comes from parameter 41 17 Jog Reference with a factory default setting of 6 00Hz The motor should ramp up to speed If the motor rotation is incorrect swap any two motor leads U T1 V T2 W T3 on the Drive ter minal and repeat the motor rotation check The encoder polarity may need to be reversed Proceed to the Auto Tuning section StartUp 4 9 Auto tuning Auto tuning the motor is required for smooth operation Use the following flow chart to determine which of the three Auto tuning Mode Selections to use START Open loop Vector or Flux Vector V F Control or V F w PG Fdbk V F Control Method A1 02 0 or 1 Motor is uncoupled from the load Use Tune No Use Standard Use Term Resistance T1 01 2 Rotate Tuning T1 01 1 71 01 0 Figure 4 2 Auto tuning Selection Flow chart iStandard Tuning Always use Standard Tuning when operating in Open Loop Vector or Flux Vector A1 02
80. returns 02 03 to zero Clear All Clears the currently saved user initialization 1 03 no longer allows selecting lt 1110 gt and returns 02 03 to zero Sets the kVA of the Drive Enter the number based on Drive model number Use the last four digits of the model number CIMR F7I This parameter only needs to be set when installing a new control board Do not change for any other reason Determines if the Data Enter key must be used to input a frequency reference from the digital operator 0 Disabled Data Enter key must be pressed to enter a frequency reference 1 Enabled Data Enter key is not required The frequency reference is adjusted by the up and down arrow keys on the digital operator without having to press the data enter key Determines if the drive will stop when the digital operator is removed when in LOCAL mode or b1 02 0 0 Disabled The drive will not stop when the digital operator is removed 1 Enabled The drive will fault OPR and coast to stop when the operator is removed Sets the initial value of the elapsed operation timer U1 13 Sets how time is accumulated for the elapsed operation timer U1 13 0 Power On Time Time accumulates when the Drive is powered 1 Running Time Time accumulates only when the Drive is running Determines parameter default values after a drive initialization A1 03 is executed This should always be set to 1 for North Amer
81. terminal Electrical Installation 2 36 BH 2 terminal specifications for PG D2 are given Table 2 19 Table 2 19 PG D2 Terminal Specifications Terminal Contents Specifications 1 12 Vdc 5 200 mA max 2 Power supply for pulse generator 0 Vdc GND for power supply 3 5 5 200 mA max 4 Line driver input RS 422 level Jal 5 Pulse inp titerminals Maximum response frequency 300 kHz 6 Common terminal 7 Pulse monitor output terminals Line driver output RS 422 level 8 TA2 E Shield connection terminal 5 Vdc and 12 Vdc cannot be used at the same time m PG X2 The terminal specifications for the PG X2 are given in Table 2 20 Table 2 20 PG X2 Terminal Specifications Terminal 3 Contents Specifications 12 Vdc 45 200 mA max Power supply for pulse generator 0 Vdc GND for power supply 5 5 200 mA max A phase input terminals Line driver input RS 422 level Maximum response frequency 300 kHz B phase input terminals Z phase input terminals Common terminal 0 GND for power supply A phase output terminals B phase output terminals Line driver output RS 422 level Z phase output terminals 2 3 4 5 6 7 Control circuit common Isolated control circuit GND
82. terminal Ground terminal Fig 1 5 Terminal Arrangement Terminal Cover Removed Physical Installation 1 5 Models CIMR F7U2022 thru 2110 4030 thru 4300 The external appearance component names and terminal arrangement of the Drive are shown in Fig 1 6 and 1 7 Mounting holes Drive cover Front cover Cooling fan Digital Operator Terminal cover A Nameplate MUT Fig 1 6 Drive Appearance Charge indicator Control circuit L terminals NI Main circuit p terminals I SZ LS LS 2 gt Ground terminal i CAT Ground terminal Fig 1 7 Terminal Arrangement Terminal Cover Removed Physical Installation 1 6 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions DIMENSIONS F7 NEMA 1 208 240 F7U20P4 2018 480V F7U40P4 4018 FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW MOUNTING HOLES AIR FOR A SIZE SCREW H2 8 EY i 1 38 DIA 2 HOLES SIZE J 87 DIA i d
83. the Speed Command to at least the minimum output frequency motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected The load may be too large The motor s responsiveness limit may be exceeded if it is accelerated too rapidly by the Drive s stall prevention function or automatic torque boost function Increase the acceleration time CI 01 or reduce the motor load Also consider increasing the motor size The motor only rotates one direction Reverse run prohibited may be selected If b1 04 Prohibition of Reverse Operation is set to 1 reverse run prohibited the Drive will not accept any reverse run commands Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 19 If The Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed If the motor rotates in the wrong direction the motor output wiring may be incorrect When the Drive operates in the forward direction the forward direction of the motor will depend on the manufacturer and the motor type so be sure to check the motor specification The direction of motor rotation can be reversed by switching any two wires among U TI V T2 and W T3 If using an encoder the polarity will also have to be switched If the Motor Stalls or Acceleration is Slow The following causes are possible The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low If the value set for L3 02 Stall Prevention Acceleration Level is set too low the acceleration time will be increased Check that
84. the modules or components Are there any irregularities such as discoloration or odor Replace the capacitors or Drive DC bus capacitors Apply power to the Drive and conduct the following inspection Table 7 2 Periodic Inspections With Power Applied em E Correciive Action Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or has the total operating time exceeded 20 000 hours Check U1 40 for elapsed cooling fan operation time Replace Cooling Fan Cooling fan s Maintenance 7 2 Preventive Maintenance Table 7 3 Preventive Maintenance Inspection Points tem Check Points Every 3 6 Months Ambient temperature Humidity Environment Dust Harmful gas General Oil mist Abnormal vibration or noise AC Power Supply Main circuit amp control voltage Loose lugs screws amp wires Hot spots parts Conductors amp Wire Corrosion Connections Bent conductors Breakage cracking or discoloration Check spacing Transformers amp Reactors Discoloration ornoise x AC Power Circuit amp Terminal Blocks Loose damaged a Devices Leakage Ruptures broken expansion DC Bus Capacitors Capacitance amp insulation resis tance Noisy Cracked As Speed reference voltage current contact operation Abnormal fan noise Cooling System Cooling Fans Fins amp Heatsink Loose connectors Free of accumulation LEDs Monitor display values Key functio
85. to 58 Communications D 4 Message Format In Modbus communication the master sends commands to the slave and the slave responds The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below The length of the data packet is controlled by the command function contents Slave address Function code Error check Fig D 4 Message Format The space between messages must support the following PLC to Drive Drive to PLC PLC to Drive Time Seconds k 24 bits long _ t 24 bits long 4 5 ms min Fig D 5 Message Spacing Slave Address Set the Drive address from 0 to 20 Hex If 0 is selected commands from the master will be broadcast i e the Drive will not return a response message Function Code The function code specifies command type There are four function codes as shown below Table D 3 Modbus Function Codes Response Message Function Code Hexadecimal Function Min Max Min Max Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes 03H Reading Holding Register Contents 06H Write In Single Holding Register 08H Loopback Test 10H Write In Several Holding Registers 11 Minimum bytes for a normal Response Message error response message is always 5 bytes Communications D 5 Data Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address test code for a loopback address and the dat
86. to terminal strip communications or an option board as indicated below On b1 02 1 Terminals 2 Communications 3 Option PCB Digital Operator 3 4 REMOTE Reference REF Indicator The status of the REMOTE Reference REF indicator is shown in Table 3 4 This indicator is always Off when the Drive is in the LOCAL mode When the Drive is in the REMOTE mode the REF indicator status is dependent on the setting of parameter 1 01 Frequency Reference Selection See Table 3 4 Table 3 4 REMOTE Reference REF Indicator Parameter b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection is set to terminal strip communications option board or pulse train as indicated below On b1 01 1 Terminals 2 Communications 3 Option PCB 4 Pulse Train Parameter b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection is set to digital operator as indicated below b1 01 0 Operator Run Indicator The status of the RUN indicator is shown in Table 3 5 when the Drive is in either the LOCAL or REMOTE mode pe Stop Indicator The status of the STOP indicator is shown in Table 3 6 when the Drive is in either the LOCAL or REMOTE mode Table 3 6 STOP Indicator Drive is decelerating to a stop or stopped Drive is in arun condition but the frequency reference is less than the min Blinking imum output frequency E1 09 or the Drive is running in REMOTE mode and t
87. was too large or the accel decel times are too short 012 Drive Overload The Drive output current exceeded the Drive s overload curve The voltage of the V F pattern was incorrect for the application The size of the Drive was too Change to a larger size Drive small Ensure the values in L6 02 and OL3 Overtorque Detection 1 L6 03 are appropriate Overtorque Det 1 Drive output current gt L6 02 for more than Motor was overloaded TN q the time set in L6 03 and L6 01 3 or 4 Check application machine status to eliminate fault Ensure the values in L6 05 and 014 Overtorque Detection 2 L6 06 are appropriate Motor was overloaded Review the V F pattern Inv Overl parameters 1 01 thru 1 13 Drive output current gt L6 05 for more than Overtorque Det 2 the time set in L6 06 and 1 6 04 3 or 4 Check application machine status to eliminate fault High Slip Braking OL Make sure the load is an inertial The output frequency stayed constant for The inertia of the load is too longer than the time set in N3 04 during large If possible reduce the load high slip braking inertia Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 6 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Digital Operator Connection Fault The digital operator was not OPR Detected when the digital operator is attached or the digital Oper Disconnect removed
88. 022B 4030B 4045B Control i 18 14 0 75 2 m 085 39 600 vinyl sheathed wire Braking Transistor Unit 5 LE 18 14 0 75 2 or equivalent 4 22 gt 600V vinyl sheathed wi r 12 10 3 5 5 5 viny is eathed wire or equivalent Control 1 2 18 14 0 75 2 4 5 4 22 Maries 8 6 8 14 1 600 vinyl sheathed wire 1210 Ga or equivalent Control i 18 14 0 75 2 Circuit Terminals Wire Type Terminal Screw Braking Transistor Unit Model CDBR 2110 Braking Transistor Unit Model CDBR 4220 12 10 3 5 5 5 600V vinyl sheathed wire or equivalent Braking Resistor Unit Model LKEB4 Control 18 14 0 75 2 1 For wire size of 8 6 8 14 use UL1283 heat resistant vinyl insulated wire or equivalent 2 for Models LKEB 20P7 to 27P5 or 40P7 to 4015 M5 for Models LKEB 2011 to 2022 or 4018 to 4045 Electrical Installation 2 17 PART SUPPLIED EXTERNAL i 1 i D 1 l 1 WENN d 1 Fuses required only if UL CUL certification is needed See separate instruction sheet 02 00025 0393 for details Fig 2 9 Wiring Single Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit to Drive F7U2022 thru F7U2110 and F7U4022 thru F7U4300 Electrical Installation 2 18 5 If two or more Braking Transistor Units and Rem
89. 0V class units the voltage values are twice that of 230V class units 2 These default values are for V F or V F with PG control methods A1 02 0 or 1 Table 5 5 V F Pattern for Drive Capacity F7U2055 and higher for 208 240V Class continued 1 03 Pattern Selection 8 9 A B D E F amp FF Max Output Frequency Max Output Voltage Base Frequency Mid Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage Min Output Frequency Min Output Voltage 1 For 480V class units the voltage values are twice that of 230V class units 2 These default values are for V F or V F with PG control methods A1 02 0 or 1 Basic Programming 5 17 Table 5 6 lists the factory settings of V F patterns when open loop vector or flux vector control method is selected 1 02 2 or 3 Table 5 6 V F Pattern for 208 240V Class Drives Factory Setting Setting Parameter Name Unit No m Loop Flux Vector Vector Max Output Frequency Max Output Voltage Base Frequency Mid Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage Min Output Frequency Min Output Voltage 1 For 480V class units the voltage values are twice that of 230V class units 2 These default values are for open loop vector or flux vector control methods A1 02 2 or 3 Basic Programming 5 18 Motor Setup B 2 01 Motor Rated Current Se
90. 1 New Tech Park Singapore 556741 SINGAPORE Phone 65 282 3003 Fax 65 289 3003 TAIPEI OFFICE AND YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION 10F 146 Sung Chiang Road Taipei Taiwan Phone 886 2 2563 0010 Fax 886 2 2567 4677 YASKAWA JASON HK COMPANY LIMITED Rm 2909 10 Hong Kong Plaza 186 191 Connaught Road West Hong Kong Phone 852 2803 2385 Fax 852 2547 5773 BEIJING OFFICE Room No 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club 21 Jianguomanwai Avenue Beijing 100020 China Phone 86 10 6532 1850 Fax 86 10 6532 1851 SHANGHAI OFFICE 27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China Phone 86 21 6553 6600 Fax 86 21 6531 4242 SHANGHAI M amp CO LTD 27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China Phone 86 21 6533 2828 Fax 86 21 6553 6677 BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO LTD 30 Xue Yuan Road Haidian Beijing 100083 China Phone 86 10 6232 9943 Fax 86 10 6234 5002 SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO LTD 7 Yongchang North Street Beijing Economic amp Technological Development Area Beijing 100076 China Phone 86 10 6788 0551 Fax 86 10 6788 2878 YEA TAICHUNG OFFICE IN TAIWAIN B1 6F No 51 Section 2 Kung Yi Road Taichung City Taiwan Phone 886 4 2320 2227 Fax 886 4 2320 2239 YEA Document Number TM F7 01 0214 08 Software Version 3011 Data Subject to change without notice Yaskawa Electric America Inc
91. 1 1 1 2 01 4 01 1 00 1 60 3 10 420 7 00 7 00 9 80 13 30 19 9 2 02 4 02 2 90 2 60 2 50 3 00 270 2 70 1 50 1 30 1 70 2 03 4 03 0 60 0 80 1 40 1 50 2 30 2 30 2 60 4 00 5 6 2 05 4 05 38 198 22 459 10 100 6 495 3 333 3 333 1 595 1 152 0 922 2 06 4 06 18 2 14 3 18 3 18 7 19 3 19 3 18 2 15 5 19 6 2 10 14 26 53 77 130 130 193 263 385 2 11 E4 07 0 4 0 75 1 5 22 3 7 4 0 5 5 7 5 11 12 02 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 5 0 8 0 8 1 0 12 03 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 6 0 7 0 8 12 04 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 18 02 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 L8 06 5 7 5 10 10 12 10 10 20 23 5 02 0 178 0 142 0 166 0 145 0 154 0 154 0 168 0 175 0 265 02 04 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Table 4 Parameter Defaults 480V continued Model Number F7U 4015 4018 4022 4030 4037 4045 4055 4075 4090 8 03 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 2 00 2 00 2 00 68 04 126 26 115 74 103 58 92 54 76 32 71 56 67 20 46 20 38 91 6 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C6 02 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 01 4 01 26 5 32 9 38 6 52 3 65 6 797 95 0 130 0 156 0 2 02 4 02 1 60 1 67 170 1 80 1 33 1 60 1 46 1 39 1 40 2 03 4 03 7 6 7 8 9 2 10 9 19 1 22 0 24 0 36 0 40 0 2 05 4 05 0 550 0 403 0 316 0 269 0 155 0 122 0 088 0 092 0 056 2 06 4 06 17 2 20 1 23 5 20 7 18 8 19 9 20 0 20 0 20 0 E2 10 440 508 586 750 925 1125 1260 1600 1760 E2 11 E4 07 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 L2 02 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 L2 03 0 9 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 5 12 04 0
92. 1 motor The Drive has an electronic overload protection function OL1 for protecting the motor from overheating The Drive bases the protection on time output current and output frequency The electronic thermal overload function is UL recognized so an external thermal overload relay is not required for single motor operation This parameter selects the motor overload curve used according to the type of motor applied Setting L1 01 1 selects a motor with limited cooling capability below rated base speed when running at 100 load The OL1 function derates the motor any time it is running below base speed Setting L1 01 2 selects motor capable of cooling itself over a 10 1 speed range when running at 100 load The func tion derates the motor when it is running at 1 10 of its rated speed or less Setting L1 01 3 selects a motor capable of cooling itself at any speed when running at 100 load This includes zero speed The OL function does not derate the motor at any speed If the Drive is connected to a single motor the motor overload protection should be enabled L1 01 1 2 or 3 unless another means of preventing motor thermal overload is provided When the electronic thermal overload function is activated fault occurs shutting OFF the drive s output thus preventing additional overheating of the motor The motor temperature is continually calculated as long as the drive is powered up When operating sever
93. 14 0 515 0 675 0 Heavy Duty Output ratings Overload capacity 96 of rated output current 107 117 108 115 120 108 120 120 107 118 120 for 60 sec Current limit 120 of rated output current Normal Duty Carrier frequency kHz 8 8 8 5 5 8 5 5 5 2 2 2 tput 3 pu 400 0 Hz frequency Maximum output voltage 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480Vac Proportional to input voltage 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480Vac 50 60 Hz Rated frequency Rated input current 3 120 165 198 238 286 334 Heavy Duty A Rated input current 5 134 198 264 Normal Duty Allowable voltage fluctuation 10 15 Power supply characteristics Allowable frequency fluctuation 5 Measures for DE Reactor Built in power supply harmonics 12 Pulse 2 Rectification Possible Control characteristics 1 The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Drive s rated output current is appropriate for the motor s rated current A 3 wire phase shifting transformer is required on the power supply for 12 pulse rectification The difference between Heavy Duty ratings and the Normal Duty ratings for the Drive are the rated input and output current overload
94. 18 Internet http www drives com YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA INC Chicago Corporate Headquarters 2121 Norman Drive South Waukegan IL 60085 U S A Phone 800 YASKAWA 800 927 5292 Fax 847 887 7310 Internet http www yaskawa com MOTOMAN INC 805 Liberty Lane West Carrollton OH 45449 U S A Phone 937 847 6200 Fax 937 847 6277 Internet http www motoman com YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION New Pier Takeshiba South Tower 1 16 1 Kaigan Minatoku Tokyo 105 0022 Japan Phone 81 3 5402 4511 Fax 81 3 5402 4580 Internet http www yaskawa co jp YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTDA Avenida Fagundes Filho 620 Bairro Saude Sao Paolo SP Brasil CEP 04304 000 Phone 55 11 5071 2552 Fax 55 11 5581 8795 Internet http www yaskawa com br YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH Am Kronberger Hang 2 65824 Schwalbach Germany Phone 49 6196 569 300 Fax 49 6196 888 301 MOTOMAN ROBOTICS AB Box 504 538525 Torsas Sweden Phone 46 486 48800 Fax 46 486 41410 MOTOMAN ROBOTEC GmbH Kammerfeldstrabe 1 85391 Allershausen Germany Phone 49 8166 900 Fax 49 8166 9039 YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD 1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld G68 9LF Scotland United Kingdom Phone 44 12 3673 5000 Fax 44 12 3645 8182 YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION Paik Nam Bldg 901 188 3 1 Ga Euljiro Joong Gu Seoul Korea Phone 82 2 776 7844 Fax 82 2 753 2639 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SINGAPORE PTE LTD Head Office 151 Lorong Chuan 04 0
95. 2 or 3 and it is possible to run the motor uncoupled from the load 1 Select the Auto tuning Menu Then select Standard Tuning in the Tuning Mode Sel parameter T1 01 0 2 Setthe motor output power T1 02 motor rated voltage T1 03 motor rated current T1 04 motor base frequency T1 05 number of motor poles T1 06 motor rated speed T1 07 obtained from the motor nameplate information If the Control Method is Flux Vector A1 02 3 be sure to set the encoder pulses per revolution PPR T1 08 After entering all of the motor parameters press the UP key to display OHz 0 00A Tuning Ready AWARNING THE NEXT KEY PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO ROTATE TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS 3 Confirm that the motor is uncoupled from the load and make sure it is safe to rotate the motor Press the RUN key to start auto tuning The Drive will energize the motor without rotating it for approximately 1 minute Then the Drive will set the required motor parameters automatically while rotating the motor for approximately minute If the Auto tuning was successful the operator keypad will display Tune Successful 4 Proceed to the Quick Setting Parameters section Start Up 4 10 BNo Rotate Tuning Use No Rotate Tuning when operating in Open Loop Vector or Flux Vector control A1 02 2 or 3 and it is impossible to uncouple the load from the motor O 1 Select the Auto tuning Menu Then select Tune
96. 20 19 26 48 110 164 219 357 416 472 583 883 14 17 36 59 127 193 232 296 389 420 691 801 901 8 8 4 2 53 59 5 9 189 191 238 30 CIMR FTUAOPATE CIMR FTU40PTIE CIMR FTU41PSIE ER M CIMR FTU43P7IE ge CIMR FTUASPSTE CIMR FTU47PSIE ES 28 M EC NI 7 480Vac 53 a sor 90 134 194 196 24 65 52 72 616 891 1204 1005 338 39 42 50 59 74 84 113 168 182 208 252 333 421 499 619 844 964 39 41 48 56 70 81 158 169 201 233 297 332 386 478 562 673 847 2 2 3 5 c E Physical Installation 1 2 Confirmations upon Delivery Receiving Checks Check the following items as soon as the Drive is received Table 1 2 Receiving Checks Check the model number on the nameplate on the right side of the Drive Reconcile with packing slip and or order information Has the correct model of Drive been delivered Inspect the entire exterior of the Drive to see if there are any dents scratches or 9 isthe Drive damaged m any way other damage resulting from shipping Are any screws or other components loose Use a screwdriver or other tool to check for tightness If there are any irregularities in the above items contact the shipping company or the distributor representative who sold the Drive or a Yaskawa office immediately Nameplate Information
97. 20 for 60 sec Software CLA 12096 of rated Carrier frequency kHz for Maximum output voltage The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Drive s rated output current is appropriate Maximum output 400 0 Hz frequency 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480Vac Proportional to input voltage the motor s rated current The difference between Heavy Duty ratings and the Normal Duty ratings for the Drive are the rated input and output current overload capacity carrier frequency current limit an maximum output frequency Parameter C6 01 must be set to value of 0 for Heavy Duty ratings and 2 for Normal Duty ratings Factory default is Heavy Duty 6 01 0 Horsepower ratings are based on 230V NEC Table 430 150 Notes Table of Contents Warnings and Cautions set utut i a AA iii Table of Contents m vii 1 52 20 1 1 F7 Model Number Enclosure Heat Loss and 1 2 Confirmations Upon 1 3 Component deett tea 1 5 Exterior and Mounting D
98. 23 B Oscillation and hunting occur with Open Loop Vector control The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine Adjust parameters C4 01 Torque Compensa tion Gain C4 02 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Parameter C2 01 S curve Characteristic Time at Acceleration Start and C3 02 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time in order Lower the gain parameters and raise the primary delay time parameters If auto tuning has not been performed proper performance may not be achieved for Vector Control Perform auto tuning or set the motor parameters through hand calculations Alternatively change the Control Mode Selection to V F Control A1 02 0 or 1 B Oscillation and hunting occur with Flux Vector control The gain adjustment may be insufficient Adjust the speed control loop ASR gain C5 01 If the oscillation points overlap with those of the machine and cannot be eliminated increase the ASR primary time delay constant C5 06 and then readjust the ASR gain C5 01 If auto tuning has not been performed proper performance may not be achieved for Flux Vector Control Perform auto tuning or set the motor parameters through hand calculations Alternatively change the Control Mode Selection to V F Control A1 02 0 or 1 Oscillation and hunting occur with PID control If there is oscillation or hunting during PID control check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust the P I and D paramet
99. 3 detected Bit A PG open detected PGO Overspeed OS or Speed deviation DEV Bit B Main circuit undervoltage UV alarm Main circuit undervoltage UV 1 control power supply error UV2 Soft charge circuit error UV3 Bit D Output phase loss LF BitE Modbus communication error CE Bit F Operator disconnected OPR Data link status Bit 0 Writing data Bit 1 Not used 0022H Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors Bit 4 Data integrity error Bits 5 to Not used 0023H Frequency reference U1 01 0024H Output frequency U1 02 0025H Output voltage reference U1 06 0026H Output current U1 03 0027H Output power U1 08 0028H Torque reference U1 09 0029H Not used 002AH Not used Sequence input status Bit 0 Input terminal 81 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 1 Input terminal S2 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 2 Multi function digital input terminal 3 ON 1 OFF 0 002BH Bit 3 Multi function digital input terminal S4 1 OFF 0 Bit 4 Multi function digital input terminal 5 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 5 Multi function digital input terminal 56 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 6 Multi function digital input terminal 7 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 7 Multi function digital input terminal 58 ON 1 OFF 0 Bits 8 toF Not used Communications D 14 Table 0 5 Monitor Data Register No Drive status Bit 0 Operation Operating 1 Bit 1 Zero speed Zero speed 1 Bit 2 Frequency agree Matched 1 Bit 3 Desired frequency agree Matched 1 Bit
100. 3 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 1 0 1 0 1 0 L8 02 95 98 78 85 85 90 90 98 108 L8 06 17 17 20 20 20 20 20 16 16 n5 02 0 244 0 317 0 355 0 323 0 320 0 387 0 317 0 533 0 592 02 04 29 2A 2B 2 2 2 2 30 31 Capacity Related Parameters 5 Notes Table B 4 Parameter Defaults 480V continued Pansies Model Number F7U 4110 4132 4160 4185 4220 4300 b8 03 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 b8 04 36 23 32 79 30 13 30 57 27 13 21 76 C6 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 C6 02 1 1 2 2 1 1 E2 01 4 01 190 0 223 0 270 0 310 0 370 0 500 0 2 02 4 02 1 40 1 38 1 35 1 30 1 30 1 25 2 03 4 03 49 0 58 0 70 0 81 0 96 0 130 0 2 05 4 05 0 046 0 035 0 029 0 025 0 020 0 014 2 06 4 06 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 2 10 2150 2350 2850 3200 3700 4700 E2 11 4 07 110 132 160 185 220 300 L2 02 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 1 L2 03 1 7 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 L2 04 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 L8 02 100 110 108 95 100 95 L8 06 16 16 14 15 15 15 n5 02 0 646 0 673 0 777 0 864 0 910 1 392 2 04 32 33 34 35 36 37 Capacity Related Parameters 6 Specifications This appendix details the standard Drive specifications Standard Drive 2 Specifications C 1 Standard Drive Specifications The standard Drive specifications are listed in the following tables 208 240Vac able C 08
101. 4 Speed agree Bit 5 Drive ready Bit 6 Alarm Bit 7 Fault Bits 8 to D Not used Bit E ComRef Bit F ComCtrl Fault details Bit 0 OPE error Bit 1 Err error Bit 2 Program mode Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 toF Not used oPE details error code 01 1 OPE02 2 03 3 06 6 10 10 OPE11 11 Not used Fault content 1 Bit 0 Fuse blown FU Bit 1 DC bus undervoltage UV1 Bit2 Control power supply undervoltage UV2 Bit 3 Main circuit answerback UV3 Bit4 Not used Bit 5 Ground fault GF Bit 6 Overcurrent OC Bit 7 Overvoltage OV Bit 8 Heatsink overtemperature OH Bit 9 Drive overheat Bit A Motor overload OL1 Bit B Drive overload OL2 Bit C Overtorque 1 OL3 Bit D Overtorque 2 OL4 Bit E Dynamic Braking Transistor RR Bit F Dynamic Braking Resistor RH 1CN status Communications D 11 Table 0 5 Monitor Data Register Fault content 2 Bit 0 External fault 3 EF3 Bit 1 External fault 4 EF4 Bit 2 External fault 5 EF5 Bit 3 External fault 6 EF6 Bit 4 External fault 7 EF7 Bit 5 External fault 8 EF8 Bit 6 Not used Bit 7 Overspeed OS Bit 8 Speed deviation DEV Bit 9 PG open PGO BitA Input phase loss PF Bit B Output phase loss LF Bit C DCCT fault CF Bit D Operator disconnect OPR Bit E EEPROM write in fault ERR Bit F Not used Fault content 3
102. 4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018 Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the directions of arrows 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2 Fig 1 9 Removing the Terminal Cover m Models CIMR F7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300 Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover pull down the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 2 Fig 1 10 Removing the Terminal Cover Attaching the Terminal Cover After wiring the terminal block attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure For Models CIMR F7U2018 4018 and smaller insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Drive and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place For Drives CIMR F7U2022 4030 and larger insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Drive and secure the terminal cover by lifting it up toward the top of the Drive Physical Installation 1 13 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover Models CIMR F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018 For Models CIMR F7U2018 4018 and smaller remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and front cover E Removing the Digital Operator Press on the side of the Digital Operator in the
103. 5 Bit 9 External fault EFO Bits A to F Not used 001BH Not used 001CH Not used 001DH Not used 001FH Not used Note Communication error details are stored until an error reset is input errors can be reset while the Drive is operating Table D 5 Monitor Data Register No Drive status Bit 0 Operation Operating 1 Stopped 0 Bit 1 Reverse operation Reverse operation 0 Forward operation Bit 2 Drive startup complete Completed 1 Not completed 0 Bit 3 Fault Fault 1 Bit 4 Data setting error Error 1 Bit 5 Multi function digital output 1 terminal M2 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 6 Multi function digital output 2 terminal M4 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 7 Multi function digital output 3 terminal M5 M6 ON 1 OFF 0 Bits 8 to Not used Communications D 13 Table 0 5 Monitor Data Register No Fault details Bit 0 Overcurrent OC or Ground fault GF Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage OV Bit 2 Drive overload OL2 Bit 3 Drive overheat OH1 OH2 Bit 4 Not used Bit 5 Fuse blown PUF Bit 6 PID feedback reference lost FbL 0021H Bip 7 External error EF EFO Bit 8 Hardware error CPF Bit 9 Motor overload OL1 or overtorque 1 OL
104. 6o e eL 4 1 Drive Start Up Preparation see 4 2 Drive Start Up Procedures rore tk calla e 4 5 Chapter 5 Basic 5 1 Basic Programming Parameters nennen 5 2 Control Methodi M n 5 2 Speed COMMANG SOUICE fpi 5 3 R n Command SOU CEt 5 4 Kessler 5 5 tec Bre TIME P 5 8 G rrier gt TP 5 9 Preset HelBrelioga n ted oim oi eie 5 10 ATONE e det EE 5 11 5 11 Motor Set p er 5 19 PG CPt OUD 5 19 Analog Output nnet 5 20 Motor Overload tree eee be racket a RE Ferr 5 21 Stall Prevention 5 22 Chapter 6 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting eeeeeeeeeeeees 6 1 Fa lt D tecti N m 6 2 Alarm DEtSCUOM 6 9 Operator Programming 4 4 441240004 0 6 13 Auto Tuninig 6
105. 7 User Parameter 8 User Parameter 9 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 3 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting Open Flux Vector User Parameter 21 Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access Level 1 01 1 These parameters are not related to the User Initialize function Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters 4 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting Sequence Selects the frequency reference input source 0 Operator Digital preset speed U1 01 or d1 01 to 41 17 Frequency Reference 1 Terminals Analog input terminal 1 or terminal A2 based on b1 01 Selection parameter H3 13 Reference Source 2 Serial Com Modbus RS 422 485 terminals R S and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected on 2CN 4 Pulse Input Selects the run command input source s 0 Operator RUN and STOP keys on digital operator b1 02 eee 1 Terminals Contact closure on terminals 1 2 2 Serial Com Modbus RS 422 485 terminals R R S and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected on 2CN Selects the stopping method when the r
106. 7 496 11 02 551 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 110 66 21 5 70 78 1 2 2 1047 496 1102 551 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 110 66 22P2 9 6 10 8 3 3 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 110 66 240V 23P7 150 168 NA 5 1047 496 1102 551 28 28 709 232 10 552 197 110 88 25 5 23 0 23 0 5 7 5 7 5 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 709 232 10 552 197 110 88 27P5 31 0 31 0 10 10 1122 732 1181 787 28 28 787 258 14 463 511 621 307 138 132 2011 45 0 46 2 15 15 11 22 732 1220 787 28 28 787 258 V4 463 5 11 621 307 138 154 2015 58 0 59 4 20 20 1319 850 1378 945 30 47 8 27 307 14 512 579 665 394 173 242 2018 71 0 748 25 25 1319 850 1496 945 30 47 8 27 307 V4 512 579 665 394 173 242 40 4 18 18 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 110 66 40 7 24 21 1A 1047 496 1102 551 28 28 630 154 335 473 197 110 66 41 5 37 37 1 5 2 1 5 2 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 630 154 mo 335 473 197 110 66 42 2 5 3 5 3 3 3 1047 496 11 02 5 51 28 28 709 232 10 414 552 197 110 88 43P7 76 76 5 5 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 709 232 10 414 552 197 110 88 45 5 12 5 12 5 7 5 7 5 1047 496 1102 551 28 28 709 232
107. 75 41P5 55972 10 07 10 ai 42 2 43P7 2 87 5 50 x 13 x 1 875 45P5 FS5972 18 07 18A 13 14152330 246 3 97 8 11 x 13 98 x 1 97 47P5 FS5972 21 07 21A de 006 x 353 50 4 63 8 11 x 13 98 x 1 97 4011 FS5972 35 07 35A e 206 x 355 x 50 4015 8 82 9 250 x 16 x 2 50 DIE FS5972 60 07 60 A dj 036 x 408 x 65 7 5 3x 13x 7250 4030 FS5972 70 52 70 183 4037 9 92 3 54 x 12 83 x 5 9 2045 FS5972 100 35 100 A as 03396 2150 Electrical Installation 2 32 Table 2 15 Recommended EMC Filters continued EMC Filter Dimensions CIMR F7U Model Number Current Rating inches mm 4055 10 36 3 54 x 14 375 x 7 FS5972 130 35 130A 47 90 x 366 x 180 13 23 4 75 x 17 75 x 6 6675 4075 FS5972 170 40 170A 6 120 x 451 x 170 4090 24 25 5 125 x 24 x 9 4375 400 5972 250 37 250 1 130 x 610 x 240 4132 40 79 11 81 x 24 x 6 3 TET FS5972 400 99 400 A 185 300 x 610 x 160 4185 23 15 10 24 x 15 20 x 4 53 FS5972 410 99 410A 10 5 260 x 386 x 115 4220 24 25 10 24 x 15 20 x 5 31 FS5972 600 99 600 A 11 260 x 386 x 135 4300 68 34 11 81 x 28 19 x 6 30 FS5972 800 99 600 A 31 300 x 716 x 160 Electrical Installation 2 33 Installing and Wiring Option Boards Option Board Models and Specifications Up to three Option Boards can be mounted in the Drive You can mount one board into each of the three option slots on the control board A C and D shown i
108. 9 059 256 1417 512 3 8 224 4132 260 260 200 NA 3228 1457 3346 1969 059 256 1417 512 3 8 265 4160 304 304 250 250 3366 1752 3606 2264 059 256 1488 551 3 8 352 FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS PROPERLY ENDORSED YASKAWA DR BY APPVL EK 11 05 02 JCM 11 13 02 Physical Installation 1 9 DIMENSIONS F7 PROTECTED CHASSIS 480V F7U4185 4300 FOR A SIZE SCREWS 1 TT til ABD A ii RATED DIMENSIONS IN INCHES RATED MODEL OUTPUT NOM Weak INPUT CIMR F7U CURRENT HP MOUN
109. Baseblock circuit fault at power up EEPROM Fault Check sum was not valid CPU Internal A D Converter Fault Cause Corrective Action Connection was broken and or Check all connections and verify master controller stopped all user side software communicating configurations Connection was broken and or Check all connections and verify master has stopped all user side software communicating configurations Motor parameters were not set Check motor parameters properly Perform auto tuning Digital operator cable was not securely connected digital Remove the digital operator and operator defective and or then reinstall it control board defective Cycle power to the Drive Control circuit was damaged Replace the Drive s Remove the digital operator once Digital operator cable was not 27 then reinstall it securely connected digital operator defective and or Cycle power to the Drive control board defective Replace the Drive Perform a factory initialization Gate array hardware failure y Cycle power to the Drive during power up Replace the control board Perform factory initialization Noise or spike was on the Cycle power to the Drive control circuit input terminals Replace the control board Perform factory initialization Noise or spike was on the Spre Cycle power to the Drive control circuit input terminals Replace the control board Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting
110. Custom E1 03 or FF To set characteristics in a to 300 0 E1 04 p 4 straight line set the same values for 1 07 and 1 09 this case Max Frequency StatUp 4 13 Control Mode Parameter Parameter Name Setting No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting H4 02 Terminal FM Gain Setting Sets terminal FM output voltage in percent of 10Vdc when 0 0 to 100 0 Terminal FM Gain selected monitor is at 100 output 1000 0 pui 4 05 Terminal AM Setting Sets terminal AM output voltage in percent of 10Vdc when 0 0 to 50 0 Terminal AM Gain selected monitor is at 100 output 1000 0 dud Sets the motor thermal overload protection OL1 based on the Motor Overload Protection cooling capacity of the motor 0 Disabled 11 01 Selection Otol MOL Fault Select 1 Standard Fan Cooled lt 10 1 motor 2 Standard Blower Cooled 10 1 motor 3 Vector Motor 1000 1 motor Range 1 02 10 When using a braking resistor use setting 0 Setting 3 is used in very specific applications 0 Disabled The drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate If the load is too large or the deceleration time is too short an OV fault may occur General Purpose The drive decelerates at the active decelera Stall Prevention Selection er ME tion rate but if the main circuit DC bus voltage reaches the stall L3 04 During Decel StallP Decel Sel prevention level 380 760 Vdc
111. D Feedback source FBL Detection is programmed to alarm e g transducer sensor build signal 65 12 2 and the PID feedback lt PID ing automation signal was not feedback loss detection level b5 13 for the installed correctly or was not Check to ensure the PID Feed PID feedback loss detection time b5 14 working back is installed and working properly Cooling Fin Cooling Fin Fan Overheat Check for dirt build up on the OH The temperature of the Drive s heatsink Cooling fan s were not fans and cooling fins Heatsnk Overt exceeded the temperature programmed in working high ambient ea is 5 parameter L8 02 temperature a heat source in Reduce the ambient temperature Enabled when L8 03 3 close proximity to Drive around the Drive present or dirty heatsink Remove the heating unit OH2 j An external overheat condition Check for an external condition Drive overheat alarm signal is input from a ists that was connected to Over Heat 2 multi function digital input terminal that is 415 2 Flashing programmed for b AER alarm Ci De SERE ea terminals S3 S8 H1 01 thru H1 06 Feedback Loss Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 10 Table 6 2 Alarm Displays and Processing continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load Motor Overheating Alarm OH3 Detected when A2 or A3
112. Drive is running Parameters A 20 Control Method Factory Setting Open Loop Vector 0 Flux Vector 55 c 60000 Ba Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Open Loop Vector Parameter Parameter Name TW Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting Flux Vector Digital Inputs Selects the function of terminals S3 to S8 3 control FWD REV selection for 3 wire sequence Local Remote Selection Closed Local Open Remote Option Inv Selection Selects source of frequency reference and sequence Closed Option Card Open 1 01 amp b1 02 Multi Step Frequency Reference 1 Based on status of Multi Step Reference 1 to 4 Multi Function Digital Input Multi Step Frequency Reference 2 Terminal S3 Function Based on status of Multi Step Reference 1 to 4 01 Selection Multi Step Frequency Reference 3 0 to 78 Terminal S3 Sel Based on status of Multi Step Reference to 4 Jog Frequency Reference Closed frequency reference from d1 17 Accel Decel Time Selection 1 Based on status of Accel Decel Time Selection 1 and 2 External BaseBlock N O Closed Output transistors forced off Open Normal operation External BaseBlock N C Closed Normal operation Open Output transistors forced off Acc Dec Ramp Hold Closed Acceleration suspended and speed held External Overheat Alarm OH2
113. ERENCE BETWEEN HEAVY DUTY HD AND NORMAL DUTY 2 ND2 IS THE RATED HORSEPOWER Brey EK1150 0 RATED OUTPUT CURRENT AND THE OVERLOAD CAPACITY PARAMETER 6 01 MUST SET TO VALUE OF 0 JCM 11 12 02 FOR HEAVY DUTY AND 2 FOR NORMAL DUTY 2 FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING IS HEAVY DUTY 6 01 0 Physical Installation 1 8 DIMENSIONS F7 PROTECTED CHASSIS 208 230V F7U2037 2011 480V F7U4075 4160 FRONT VIEW MOUNTING HOLES FOR SIZE SCREW LE IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE ADEQUATE COOLING THE DRIVE MUST BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW A MINIMUM OF FREE AIR SPACE OF 1 2 INCHES ON SIDES AND 4 75 INCHES TOP AND BOTTOM THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN HEAVY DUTY HD AND NORMAL DUTY 2 ND2 IS THE RATED HORSEPOWER RATED OUTPUT CURRENT AND THE OVERLOAD CAPACITY PARAMETER C6 01 MUST
114. Elapsed Time 8 J3 19 Elapsed Time 9 J3 20 Elapsed Time 10 Digital Operator 3 10 Quick Setting Menu QUICK This menu is used to set read the most commonly used parameters in the Drive Follow the key operations in Fig 3 6 to access the Quick Setting Menu QUICK QUICK Reference Source MENU Main Menu 2 Quick Setting Terminals DU x2 Fig 3 6 Quick Setting Parameter Access Procedure Use and keys to scroll through the Quick Setting parameter list Table 3 11 Quick Setting Parameter List Parameter Parameter Name 11 01 Motor Overload Protection Selection E2 04 Number of Motor Poles Stall Prevention Selection During Decel Digital Operator 3 11 Programming Menu ADV This menu is used to set read every parameter in the Drive Follow the key operations below Fig 3 7 to access the Program ming Menu ADV ADV Initialization Main Menu Programming Select Language Fig 3 7 Programming Menu Access Procedure gt Use keys to scroll through the Programming parameter group list For complete parameter listing see appendix A 08 16 Setup F4_AO 08 12 Setup 5 0 02 08 Setup F6 Communications Option Setup HI Digital Inputs H2 Digital Outputs H3 Analog Inputs H4 Analog Outputs H5 Serial Communications Setup H6 Pulse Setup L1__ Motor
115. Examples Electrical Installation 2 11 Dynamic Braking Connections E General Dynamic braking DB enables the motor to be brought to a smooth and rapid stop This is achieved by dissipating the regenerative energy of the AC motor across the resistive components of the Dynamic Braking option For further details on dynamic braking operation see the instruction sheet shipped with dynamic braking components Drives F7U20P4 thru F7U2018 and F7U40P4 thru F7U4018 have an integral braking transistor and require the addition of a Remote Mounted Resistor Unit or a Heat Sink Mount Resistor ERF All higher rated drives require the use of a Braking Transistor Unit CDBR and a Remote Mount Resistor Unit Remote Mount Resistor Units typically mount outside of the electrical enclosure Braking Transistor Units mount inside of the electrical enclosure Heat Sink Mount Resistors mount to the back of the drive attaching directly to the heat sink The following tables list the specifications for the braking unit and resistor according to motor ratings Table 2 7 Heat Sink Mount Dynamic Braking Resistor 3 Duty Cycle Heat Sink Mount Resistor Approx Dimensions Inches Drive Model No Resistance Power Braking Ohms Watts Torque Height Width Depth F7U 208 240 Electrical Installation 2 12 Required Dynamic Braking Units and Resistors Typical Per
116. F7U4185 35 CIMR F7U4220 36 CIMR F7U4300 37 Capacity Related Parameters B 2 Parameters Affected by Drive Capacity Setting The factory setting of the parameters in Table B 2 may change when the Drive capacity is changed via parameter 02 04 See Table B 3 and B 4 for a complete list Table B 2 Parameters Affected by 02 04 Parameter Parameter Name Parameter Parameter Name Number Digital Operator Display Number Digital Operator Display Energy Saving Control Filter Time Constant Motor 2 Rated Slip b8 03 Energy Saving F T 4 02 Motor Rated Slip Energy Saving Coefficient Value Motor 2 No Load Current b8 04 Energy Save COEF E4 03 No Load Current Carrier Frequency Duty Motor 2 Line to Line Resistance C6 01 Heavy Normal Duty E4 05 Term Resistance Carrier Frequency Selection E4 06 Motor 2 Leakage Inductance C6 02 CarrierFreq Sel Leakage I nductance Motor Rated Current Motor 2 Rated Output Bes Motor Rated FLA 4 07 Motor 2 Rated KW Motor Rated Slip Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Time 2 02 Motor Rated Slip 2 02 PwrL Ridethru t Motor No load Current Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time E2 03 No load Current L2 03 PwrL Baseblock t Motor Line to Line Resistance Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time E2 05 Term Resistance L2 04 PwrL V F Rampt Motor Leakage Inductance Overheat Pre Alarm Level E2 06 Leakage I nductance L8 02 OH Pre Alarm Lvi Motor Iron Loss for Torque Co
117. FR Time Con stant 2 ae Time 2 Hig Braking Deceleration Frequency Width HSB Decel Width High Slip Braking Current Limit HSB Current Ref High Slip Braking Dwell Time at Stop HSB DwelTimQ Stp High Slip Braking Overload Time HSB OL Time If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded hunting prevention may reduce the vibration 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 00 to 10 00 2000 2000 100 to 200 150 0 0 to 30 to Sets the gain for the Hunting Prevention Function If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded and n1 01 1 increase the gain by 0 1 until vibration ceases If the motor stalls while 1 01 1 decrease the gain by 0 1 until the stalling ceases AFR Tuning Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain in the automatic frequency regulator AFR Normally there is no need to change this setting Adjust this parameter as follows If hunting occurs increase the set value If response is low decrease the set value Adjust the setting by 0 05 units at a time while checking the response Sets the time constant to control the rate of change in the speed feedback detection control Sets the time constant to control the amount of change in the speed at low speed High Slip Braking Sets how aggressively the Drive decreases the output frequency as it stops the motor using high slip braking HSB If overvoltage OV faults occur during HSB this parameter may need t
118. H Reference5 erence 3 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 t 06 Frequency Reference 6 equency reference when multi function input Multi step speed 0 00Hz Reference 6 erence 1 3 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 i 41 07 Frequency Reference 7 equency reference when multi function input Multi step speed 0 00Hz Reference 7 erence 2 3 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 Frequency Reference 8 equency reference when multi function input Multi step speed Reference 8 erence 1 2 3 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 Description Open Loop Vector Flux Vector Ug lt 0 00Hz A Frequency Reference 9 equency reference when multi function input Multi step speed Reference 9 erence 4 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 0 00 to 0 00Hz E1 04 Frequency Reference 10 equency reference when multi function input Multi step speed Value 0 00Hz Reference 10 erence 1 4 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 A A Frequency Reference 11 equency reference when multi function input Multi step speed Reference 11 erence 2 4 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 0 00Hz A Frequency Reference 12 equency reference when multi function input Multi step speed Reference 12 erence 1 2 4 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 0 00Hz A Frequency Reference 13 equency reference when multi function input Multi step speed
119. I 14 Input Selection terminal A2 Channel 3 terminal A3 AI 14 Input Sel 1 3 channel addition Summed values of channels 1 to 3 is the frequency reference When set to 0 select 1 for b1 01 In this case the multi function input Option Inverter selection cannot be used E DI 08 16 Setup Sets the function of the DI 08 or the DI 16H2 digital input option board 0 BCD 1 unit BCD 0 1 unit BCD 0 01 unit DI 08 DI 16H2 Input BCD 1 Hz unit Selection BCD 0 1 Hz unit DI Input BCD 0 01 Hz unit BCD 5 digit input only effective when the DI 16H2 is used Binary input When 01 03 is set to 2 or higher the input will be BCD and the units will change to the 01 03 setting See 08 12 Setup AO 08 AO 12 Channel 1 Sets the number of the monitor item to be output 01 00 Monitor Selection The following settings cannot be set 1 to 45 AO Sel 4 10 to 14 25 28 29 31 34 39 40 41 08 12 Channel 1 Sets the channel gain 0 0 to 4 02 4 AO Chl Gain Ex Set F4 02 50 to output 100 at 5 0V output 1000 0 AO 08 AO 12 Channel 2 Sets the number of the monitor item to be output 01 00 Monitor Selection The following settings cannot be set 1 to 45 AO Ch2 Sel 4 10 to 14 25 28 29 31 34 39 40 41 08 12 Channel 2 Sets the channel 2 gain 0 0 to Gain Ex Set F4 02 50 to output 100 at 5 0V output 1000 0 AO Gain uen Dune Channels Sets the channel 1 bia
120. L3 1 H2 B2 0 4 U TI V T2 W T3 10 6 to 13 2 1 2 to 1 5 S L2 T L3 U T 6 to 13 12 1 2 to 1 5 S L2 T L3 1 2 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 Drive Model CIMR F7U Terminal Symbol Wire Type 10 6 to 13 2 1 2to 1 5 4 4 S L2 T L3 1 2 B2 42P2 U T1 V T2 W T3 10 6 to 13 2 1 2 to 1 5 S L2 TIL3 Hi 2 B1 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 10 6 to 13 2 1 2 to 1 5 2 to 5 5 R LI 12 TL3 Hi 2 B2 12 to 10 45P5 U T1 V T2 W T3 10 6 to 13 2 3 5 to 5 5 1 2 to 1 5 600 R LI S L2 T L3 2 1 2 B1 B2 10 UL Approved 47P5 U T1 V T2 W T3 10 6 to 13 2 5 5 vinyl sheathed 1 2 to 1 5 12 to 10 or equivalent 3 5 to 5 5 R LI S L2 T L3 1 C2 B2 21 99 10 to 6 4011 U T1 V T2 W T3 M5 2 5 5 5 to 14 10 7 5 5 8 R LI S L2 T L3 1 2B1 B2 M5 E WF U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 8 to 14 8 D 2 5 10 to 6 10 ET 5 5 to 14 5 5 4 0 to 5 0 CN n 33 6 C R LI S L2 TIL3 O 91 35 2 to 43 99 8102 04 PES WS 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 38 8 4018 T 21 99 8 1 5 2 5 AN T 35 2 to 43 99 8to4 8 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 22 8 R LI S L2 T L3 1 3 SUL21 4 TI L31 35 2 to 43 99 6 to4 22 4 0 to 5 0 14 to 22 2 9 0 to 10 0 14 to 38 14 Electrical Installation 2 5 Table 2 2 480 Wire Sizes and Co
121. N 693 9 to 867 4 250 X 4P 78 4 to 98 0 125 X 4P Application Dependent 250 2 125 x 2P 16 1 25 250 x 4P 125 x 4P 4 0 x 4P 100 x 4P 693 9 to 867 4 400 X 4P go Xab R L1 S L2 T L3 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L33 U T1 V T2 W T3 e Application Dependent 400 x 2P 203 x 2P 16 1 25 114 to 12 3 1 1 00 1 200 5400 5400 13014 Wire size range provided for drives using insulated screw type terminal blocks 2 Recommended wire sizes are based on the normal duty ND current ratings and NEC Article 310 Table 310 16 75 degree Celsius copper or equivalent When sizing wiring based on the heavy duty HD current ratings consult NEC Article 430 and any other applicable codes Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 296 of the rated voltage Line IMPORTANT voltage drop is calculated as follows Line voltage drop V 8 x wire resistance x wire length m x current A x 103 Electrical Installation 2 7 ST Closed Loop Connectors WireSize Terminal E mm E JST Closed Loop Connectors Lugs EN a 1 oo 1 CA AA S 1 DI 00 oou N N 250 300 125 150 400 200 650MCM 325 Wire si
122. No Rotate in the Tuning Mode Sel parameter T1 01 1 2 Setthe motor output power T1 02 motor rated voltage T1 03 motor rated current T1 04 motor base frequency T1 05 number of motor poles T1 06 and motor rated speed T1 07 obtained from the motor nameplate informa tion After entering all of the motor parameters press the UP key to display 2 0 00A Tuning Ready 3 Press the RUN key to start auto tuning The Drive will set the required motor parameters automatically while ener gizing the motor without rotation for approximately 1 minute If the Auto tuning is successful the operator keypad will display Tune Successful O 4 Proceed to the Quick Setting Parameters section Resistance Tuning Terminal Resistance Tuning is the only auto tuning method available when using V F or V F w Feedback control A1 02 0 or 1 1 Select the Auto tuning Menu Then select Term Resistance in the Tuning Mode Sel parameter 1 01 2 2 Setthe motor output power T1 02 and motor rated current T1 04 obtained from the motor nameplate information After entering all of the motor parameters press the UP key to display OHz 0 00A Tuning Ready 3 Press the RUN key to start auto tuning The Drive will set the required motor parameter automatically while energize the motor without rotation for approximately 30 seconds If the Auto tuning is successful the operator keypa
123. OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal V T2 Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal W T3 Expected reading is OL displayed All Drives have a Control Power Fuse The fuse is located on either the Power PCB 3PCB or the Gate Drive PCB 3PCB The Control Power Fuse protects the primary switching mode power supply Control Power Fuse 1 Set a digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale 2 Place one lead of the multi meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi meter on the other side of the fuse 3 If the fuse is good the measured value will be zero ohms If the fuse is bad the measured value will be infinite ohms Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 28 Table 6 6 Main Circuit Test Procedure continued The Heat Sink amp Internal Cooling Fans cool the heat sink as well as the output transistor modules of the Drive Conduct a visual inspection to ensure the fan turns freely If there is no physical evidence that the fan is bad the fan motor can be checked with a 24 Cooling Fans digital mutli meter Heat Sink amp Internal Set the digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Measure across the fan motor terminals If zero ohms are measured conclude that the fan motor is shorted If infinite ohms are measured conclude that t
124. OOP WITH THE GROUND LEADS See Figure 2 4 17 Review terminal functions of signal and control circuits Refer to Table 2 8 18 Verify if any customer safety devices are required e g firestat freezestat high static pressure 19 Record the following motor nameplate information Motor Rated Power KW Voltage Full Load Amps Rated Frequency Number of Poles Rated Speed RPM 20 Verify that the commercial power supply is within the rated Drive input voltage Power Supply VAC Drive Input Voltage VAC 2 Verify that the leads in the 3 Phase electric motor conduit box are configured for the proper voltage 22 Ensure Motor Rated Current is less than or equal to Drive Output Amps If multiple motors are being used make sure that the Motor Rated Current sum is less than or equal to Drive Output Amp rating Please note that if multiple motors are being operated from one Drive each motor must have its own overload and short circuit protection StartUp 4 3 23 24 225 26 27 28 29 29 30 31 Wire all necessary input power leads to the Drive DO CONNECT MOTOR DRIVE YET Wire all necessary ground wires to the Drive Wire all necessary control wires to the Drive Ensure that the power leads are connected to the R L1 S L2 and T L3 terminals in the Drive Tighten all of the three phase power and ground connections Please check that all control and signal terminatio
125. Operate Properly The following causes are possible the digital operator is securely connected to the Drive motor does not operate when the RUN key on the Digital Operator is pressed The following causes are possible The Local Remote mode is not selected properly The status of the SEQ and REF REMOTE LEDs should be OFF for Local mode Press the LOCAL REMOTE key to switch The Drive is not in drive mode If the Drive is not in drive mode it will remain in ready status and will not start Press the MENU key once and then press the DATA ENTER key The Drive is now in drive mode The Speed Command is too low If the Speed Command is set below the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the Drive will not operate Raise the Speed Command to at least the minimum output frequency motor does not operate when an external run command is input The following causes are possible The Drive is not in drive mode If the Drive is not in drive mode it will remain in ready status and will not start Press the MENU key once and then press the DATA ENTER key The Drive is now in drive mode The Local Remote mode is not selected properly The status of the SEQ and REF REMOTE LEDs should be ON for Local mode Press the LOCAL REMOTE key to switch The Speed Command is too low If the Speed Command is set below the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the Drive will not operate Raise
126. PPR pulses per revolution Refer to Chapter 2 Electrical Installation for details 8 Proceed to the correct Control Method Startup Procedure Table 4 2 Control Method Startup Procedure V F V F Startup V F w PG Feedback V F w PG Startup Open Loop Vector Open Loop Vector Startup Flux Vector Flux Vector Startup StartUp 4 5 V F Startup 9 Li Li O 10 11 12 13 14 15 Apply input power to the Drive Set the control method of the drive to V F Control by pressing the MENU key twice for the Quick Setting menu Press the ENTER key to display A1 02 Control Method Use the UP and DOWN keys and the DATA ENTER key to set this parameter to 0 V F Control Ensure the DATA ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive Entry Accepted will briefly appear Set the Drive input voltage measured in Step 1 In the Quick Setting menu go to parameter E1 01 Input Voltage This parameter sets the nominal input voltage the Drive will receive Table 4 2 Input Voltage Setting Parameter Parameter Name Digital Operator Display e dais avo ng 155 0 to 255 0 240 0 208 240Vac 208 240Vac Quick Setting Input Voltage Setting 5 Input Voltage 310 0 to 510 0 480 0 Programming 480Vac 480Vac Select an appropriate V F pattern per the application Go to parameter E1 03 V F Selection and set this parameter the application A stand
127. Power Control supply circuits Control circuits one lt N 6 Control supply circuits 8 Input fuses or molded case circuit breakers are required for proper branch circuit protection for all Drives Failure to use recommended fuses circuit breakers See Appendix E may result in damage to the Drive and or personal injury 2 Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12 pulse rectification Electrical Installation 2 9 Circuit Configurations 480Vac The 480Vac main circuit configurations of the Drive are shown in Table 2 5 Table 2 5 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 480Vac CIMR F7U40P4 to 4018 CIMR F7U4022 to 4055 R L1 S L2 R1 L11 81 121 1 131 4 Control circuits Control circuits en R L1 S L2 R1 L11 51 121 T1 L31 w qeu G 9 amp 9 amp L CX Control circuits S Lg Input fuses or molded case circuit breakers are required for proper branch circuit protection for all Drives Failure to use recommended fuses circuit breakers See Appendix E may result in damage to the Drive and or personal injury 2 Consult you
128. Sink Mount Resistor Program L8 01 to 1 to enable overheat protection for heat sink mount braking resistor Operation Check 9 During dynamic braking verify that the BRAKE lamp inside the Braking Unit is lit 10 During dynamic braking ensure that the required deceleration characteristic is obtained If not contact Yaskawa for assis tance 11 Reinstall and secure covers on the Braking Transistor Units Remote Mount Resistor Units and the Drive Electrical Installation 2 20 Control Wiring Control Circuit Wire Sizes For remote operation keep the length of the control wiring to 50m or less Separate the control wiring from high power lines input power motor leads or relay sequence circuits to reduce noise induction from peripheral devices When setting speed commands from an external speed potentiometer use shielded twisted pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E G as shown in Fig 2 5 Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown below Table 2 10 Shield terminal V Speed setting power supply 15 V 20 mA 2 i 2 lt lt 1 Master speed reference 10 to 10 V ac DE 2 Master speed reference 4 to 20 mA 2kQ lt Auxiliary reference __ RP Pulse input 32 kHz max PLA PLP Y Y AC Analog common Fig 2 12 Analog Input Terminal Configuration Table 2 10 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes Same for all Dri
129. Stop Stopping Method Selection 1 Coast to Stop 0103 Stopping Method 2 DC Injection to Stop 3 Coast with Timer A new run command is ignored if input before the timer expires 01 Acceleration Time 1 Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency 1 0 0 Accel Time 1 04 to 10 0sec C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero E1 6000 0 Decel Time 1 04 Selects the number of pulses second of the output voltage waveform Setting range determined by C6 01 setting 0 Low noise Fe 2 0 kHz kVA Carrier Frequency Selection Fe 5 0 kHz ltoF Denei CarrierFreq Sel 8 0 kHz p 10 0 kHz 12 5 kHz 15 0 kHz F Program Determined by the settings of C6 03 thru C6 05 41 01 Frequency Reference 1 ideni idi 41 02 Frequency Reference 2 Frequency reference when multi function input Multi step speed 0 00Hz Reference 2 reference 1 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 41 03 Frequency Reference 3 Frequency reference when multi function input Multi step speed 0 00Hz Reference 3 reference 2 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 41 04 Frequency Reference 4 Frequency reference when multi function input Multi step speed 0 00Hz Reference 4 reference 1 2 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 Frequency reference when Jog Frequency Reference Forward Jog or
130. T K k kK K k k K k k kK kK k kK PRINT INPUT Enter the number of bytes in the message maxbyte FOR bytenum 1 TO maxbyte STEP 1 PRINT Enter byte bytenum INPUT byte amp byte amp byte amp AND amp HFF amp crcsum crcsum byte7 AND amp HFFFF amp FOR shift 1 TO 8 STEP 1 ercshift INT crcsum 2 AND amp H7FFF amp IF crcsum AND amp H1 amp THEN crcsum crcshift XOR crcconst ELSE crcsum crcshift END IF NEXT shift NEXT bytenum lower amp crcsum AND amp HFF amp upper amp INT crcsum 256 AND amp HFF amp PRINT Lower byte 150 HEX lower amp PRINT Upper byte 2nd HEX upper amp Typical CRC 16 Calculation Program in C buf pointer to character array that contains the characters used to calculate CRC bufLen number of characters to calculate CRC for pointer to the array that contains the calculated CRC void getMBCRC cahr buf int bufLen char crc unsigned long _0 Oxffff Declare and initialize variables unsigned long crc 1 0x0000 int ij for 1 0 i lt bufLen i Loop through characters of input array _0 unsigned long buf i amp OxOff XOR current character with OxOOff for j 0 j lt 8 j Loop through character bits crc 1 crc 0 gt gt 1 amp Ox7fff Shift result right one place and store if crc 0 amp 0x0001 if pre shifted value bit 0 is set
131. TING 085 HD ND AMPS HD ND WoW H H2 w2 D Di 4185 370 414 300 300 350 5000 1063 5138 2795 079 335 1626 494 3 8 572 480V 4220 506 515 350 400 400 450 5000 1063 5138 2795 079 335 1626 494 3 8 617 4300 675 675 450 500 500 5670 1437 5807 3606 079 366 1626 494 3 8 893 FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS PROPERLY ENDORSED IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE ADEQUATE COOLING YASKAWA THE DRIVE MUST BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW A MINIMUM OF FREE AIR OF 1 2 INCHES ON SIDES AND 4 75 INCHES TOP AND BOTTOM DRBY EK 11 05 02 THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN HEAVY DUTY HD AND NORMAL DUTY 2 ND2 IS THE RATED HORSEPOWER RATED OUTPUT CURRENT AND THE OVERLOAD CAPACITY PARAMETER C6 01 MUST BE SET TO VALUE OF 0 APPVL JCM 11 13 02 FOR HEAVY DUTY AND 2 FOR NORMAL DUTY 2 FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING IS HEAVY DUTY C6 01 0 Physical Installation 1 10 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site Install the Drive as described below and maintain optimum conditions Installation Site Install the Drive under the following conditions in UL Pollution Degree 1 amp 2 environments This excludes wet locations where surfaces may become conductive due to moisture and contaminant loading Table 1 3 Installation Site Specifications Ambient Operating Temperature Plenum Rated NEMA Type 1 14 F to 104 F 10 to 40 C 9596 RH or less no condensation Open Chassis 14 F to 113 F 10 to 45 C 9596 RH or less no condensation
132. To Stop External Fault Normally Open Always Detected Coast To Multi Function Digital Input Stop Terminal S6 Function External Fault Normally Closed Always Detected Coast To 0 to 78 Selection Stop Terminal S6 Sel External Fault Normally Open During Run Coast To Stop External Fault Normally Closed During Run Coast To Stop External Fault Normally Open Always Detected Fast Stop External Fault Normally Closed Always Detected Fast Stop External Fault Normally Open During Run Fast Stop External Fault Normally Closed During Run Fast Stop External Fault Normally Open Always Detected Alarm Only External Fault Normally Closed Always Detected Alarm Only External Fault Normally Open During Run Alarm Only External Fault Normally Closed During Run Alarm Only Continued on following page Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 22 Parameter No a Digital Inputs 1 04 1 05 1 06 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Multi Function Digital Input Terminal S6 Function Selection Terminal S6 Sel Multi Function Digital Input Terminal S7 Function Selection Terminal S7 Sel Multi Function Digital Input Terminal S8 Function Selection Terminal 58 Sel Table A1 F7 Parameter List Continued Description 30 PID integral reset Closed Set integra
133. Variable Torque 180Hz with 60Hz Base Variable Torque 2 When a factory initialization is performed and the setting of E1 03 F or FF E1 03 is unaffected but the IMPORTANT settings of E1 04 through E1 13 are returned to their factory default settings Basic Programming 5 13 B 1 04 Maximum Output Frequency Setting Range 40 0 to 400 0Hz Factory Default 60 0Hz B 1 05 Maximum Output Voltage Setting Range 0 0 to 255 0V 240V Models 0 0 to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 230 0V 240V Models 460 0V 480V Models B 1 06 Base Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 400 0Hz Factory Default 60 0Hz B 1 09 Minimum Output Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 400 0Hz Factory Default 1 5Hz B E1 13 Based Voltage Setting Range 0 0 to 255 0V 240V Models 0 0 to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 0 0V 240V Models 0 0V 480V Models To set up a custom V f pattern program the points shown the diagram below using parameters E1 04 through E1 13 Be sure that the following condition is true Voltage Max Voltage E1 05 emet Mid Voltage 1 12 Base Voltage E1 1 3 j Mid Voltage E1 08 Min Voltage E1 10 E109 1 07 Ei 06 E111 E104 Frequency Min Mid Base Mid Max Freq Freq Freq FreqB Freq A Fig 5 9 V F Pattern Parameters Parameters E1 07 E1 08 E1 10 E1 11 and 1 12 are accessible throug
134. a the register contains The data length changes depending on the command details Error Check Errors are detected during communication using CRC 16 Perform calculations using the following method 1 The factory setting for CRC 16 communication is typically zero but when using the Modbus system set the factory setting to one e g set all 16 bits to 1 2 Calculate CRC 16 using MSB as slave address LSB and LSB as the MSB of the final data 3 Calculate CRC 16 for response messages from the slaves and compare them to the CRC 16 in the response messages CRC 16 At the end of the message the data for CRC error checking is sent in order to detect errors in signal transmission In Modbus RTU the error check is conducted in the form of a CRC 16 Cyclical Redundancy Check The CRC field checks the contents of the entire message It is applied regardless of any parity check method used for the individual characters of the message The CRC field is two bytes containing 16 bit binary value The CRC value is calculated by the transmitting device which appends the CRC to the message The receiving device recalculates a CRC during receipt of the message and compares the calculated value to the actual value it received in the CRC field If the two values are not equal an error results The CRC is started by first preloading a 16 bit register to all 1 s Then a process begins of applying successive 8 bit bytes of the message to the current co
135. access the Auto Tuning Menu A TUNE TATUNE Tuning Mode Sel Main Menu Term Resistance 2 Auto Tuning Fig 3 9 Auto Tuning Menu Access Procedure Digital Operator 3 13 Use and keys to scroll through the Auto Tuning parameter list Depending on the Control Method 1 02 setting only certain Auto Tuning parameters will be accessible See table below Table 3 13 Auto Tuning Parameter List Auto Tuning Parameters Control Method T1 01 Tuning Mode Selection T1 02 Motor Rated Power T1 03 Rated Voltage X V F V F w PG Flux Vector After setting Auto Tuning parameters according to motor nameplate specifications press so that the following screen appears on the digital operator A TUNE Auto Tuning OHz 0 00 Tuning Ready Press RUN key Press the RUN key on the digital operator to start Auto Tuning The motor will automatically run During this process the motor parameters will be automatically set in the Drive according to the measured values Digital Operator 3 14 Example of Changing a Parameter Table 3 14 provides an example of how to change parameter C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 from 30 seconds to 40 seconds Table 3 14 Changing Parameter the Programming Menu Step Digital Operator Display Description Number DRIVE Rdy Frequency Ref U1 03 DRIVE Main Menu Operation QUICK Main Menu Quick Setting ADV
136. aking Units Current Rating Dynamic Braking Units Current Rating Power Power wien 7 CDBR4045B 18 121A _ 162 of 30HP e tof CDBR 4045B 136ohm 1 amp 0A T 51 of 40HP 2 of CDBR 4045B 180 ohm 12 1A 82 of 14 9 of S0HP Yi 2 of CDBR 4045B 1 amp 0ohm 12 1A 151 of 60HP Peak 204 CDBR 4045B 13 6ohm 160A 159 OF ZSHP__ 13 0 of 75HP Braking 101 CDBR 4220B 4200 500A 7 192 100 14 7 of 100HP Power 101 CDBR 4220B 4 20 _50 0 153 01125 _ 11 7 of 125HP lof CDBR 42208 320ohm 640A 167 01150 12 1 of 150HP 12 154 of 200HP 11 5 of 200HP Average 146 of 250HP 11 1 of 250HP Braking 204 CDBR 4220B 320ohm 640A 66 1300 12 0 of 300HP sem CDBR 4220B 3 20 64 0 148 10 7 of 500 Hedw 2 of CDBR 4045B 36 0 121A 152 of 30HP__ 50 1 of 30HP ii ooh test ot ss o Son Tof CDBR 4220B 8 40 50 0 194 of 5OHP 59 4 of 50HP or coen ae Tof CDBR 4220B 6 40 ohm _64 0 169 0f 75HP 49 196 of 75HP s ser coen ae sao hn span pasear Baer 2 of CDBR 4220B 8 40 50 0 153 0f 125HP 46 8 of 125 20f CDBR 4220B 6 40 64 0 167 of 150HP 48 6 of 150HP so So Coen ae san ain 5404 fre
137. al Installation 2 42 Wiring Terminal Blocks B Wire Sizes Same for All Models Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table 2 22 Terminal Pulse generator power supply Pulse input terminal Pulse monitor output terminal Terminal Screws Table 2 22 Wire Sizes Wire Thickness AWG mm Stranded wire 20 to 17 0 5 to 1 0 Single wire 20 to 17 0 5 to 1 0 Shield connection terminal Wiring Method and Precautions 20 to 16 0 5 to 1 5 Observe the following precautions when wiring Wire Type Shielded twisted pair wire Shielded polyethylene covered vinyl sheath cable Belden 9504 Hitachi KPEV S or equivalent Separate the control signal lines for the PG Encoder Feedback Board from main circuit lines and power lines Connect the shield when connecting a PG Encoder The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors caused by noise Also do not use any lines that are more than 100 m long Refer to Fig 2 16 for details on connect ing the shield Do not solder the ends of wires Doing so may cause contact faults When not using straight solderless terminals strip the wires to a length of approximately 5 5 mm Useshielded twisted pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires and connect the shield to the shield connection terminal Electrical Installation 2 43 Selecting the Number of PG Encoder Pulses The setting for the numbe
138. al motors with one drive install a thermal relay on each motor and disable the motor overload protection L1 0120 Basic Programming 5 21 Stall Prevention m 13 04 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Selection Seting Disabled General purpose Enabled factory default Intelligent stall prevention Enabled Stall prevention with DB resistor Enabled The stall prevention during deceleration function adjusts the deceleration time in order to prevent OV fault trips during deceleration If L3 04 0 stall prevention is disabled and if the load is large and the deceleration time short enough the Drive may fault and stop If L3 04 1 the standard stall prevention function is enabled If during deceleration the DC Bus voltage exceeds the stall prevention level see table below the Drive will discontinue decelerating and maintain speed Once the DC Bus voltage has dropped below the stall prevention level deceleration will continue The Figure 5 11 demonstrates deceleration when L3 04 1 Drive Voltage Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration 240Vac 380Vdc 760 1 01 lt 400 660Vdc a Set decel time b Decel time is extended Output Frequency t DC Bus 380 660 760 Vdc Voltage Fig 5 11 Stall Prevention If L3 01 2 the intelligent stall prevention function is enabled The active deceleration time is used as a starting point and the Drive will attempt to decelerate as quickly as possible wit
139. als RP and AC Make sure the H6 parameters are properly set Basic Programming 5 3 B b1 02 Run Source Selection Operator RUN and STOP keys on digital operator Terminals Contact closure between terminal S1 and SN factory default Modbus Serial Communication RS 422 485 ter minals R 5 and S Option Board Option board connected to 2CN In order to run the Drive and motor in REMOTE mode the Drive must receive a run command and a speed command from an external source Parameter b1 02 specifies from where the RUN command will be accepted To issue a run command from the digital operator Set b1 02 0 and use the RUN and STOP keys on the digital operator to start and stop the Drive To issue the run command from the terminals Set b1 02 1 and select between 2 wire and 3 wire operation according to the following 2 Wire The factory setting is for 2 wire operation In the 2 wire configuration a closure between S1 and SN will be interpreted as a Forward run command by the Drive A closure between S2 and SN will be interpreted as a Reverse run command If both 1 and S2 are closed the Drive will alarm and the digital operator will flash an EF fault The drive will not run in this condition FWD Run Stop REV Run Stop Fig 5 1 2 Wire Control 3 Wire When any of the multi function digital input parameters H1 01 through H1 05 is set to 0 terminals S1 and S2 become
140. ameter Name Description Setting Factory 0 Digital Operator Display Range Setting Loop Flux Vector Vector pm Analog Inputs Terminal A1 Signal Level Sets the signal level of terminal A1 H3 01 Selection 0 0 to 10 Vdc Term 1 Lvl Sel 1 10 to 10Vdc H3 02 Terminal A1 Gain Setting Sets the output level when 10V is input as a percentage of the Terminal A1 Gain maximum output frequency 1 04 H3 03 Terminal A1 Bias Setting Sets the output level when is input as a percentage of the 1000 Terminal 1 Bias maximum output frequency E1 04 100 0 Terminal Signal Level Sets the signal level of terminal A3 H3 04 Selection 0 0 to 10 Vde Terminal A3 Signal 1 10 to 10 Parameters 26 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting nic Flux Vector Vector Selects the function of terminal A3 0 Add to Terminal A1 100 Maximum output frequency E1 04 1 Frequency Reference Gain FGAIN 100 Frequency reference command value A1 Total gain Internal gain H3 02 x FGAIN 2 Aux Frequency Reference 1 Used in conjunction with multi function inputs multi step frequency reference 1 4 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 3 Aux Frequency Reference 2 Used in conjunction with multi function inputs multi step frequency reference 1 4 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 4 Output Voltage B
141. and the Drive is commanded to operator connector was tor run through the digital operator b1 02 0 broken Overshooting undershooting Adjust the ASR settings in the C5 Motor Overspeed was occurring parameter group OS Detected when F1 03 0 to 2 and A1 02 1 or 3 exceeded the setting in 1 08 for a longer 09 are not appropriate F1 09 EP Check the input circuit and reduce High input voltage at R L1 the input power to within specifi S L2 and T L3 put p P DC Bus Overvoltage cations The DC bus voltage has exceeded the tri OV P The dece eren time is set O DC Bus Overvolt Pont too short 208 240Vac Trip point is 410Vdc 480Vac Trip point is 8320Vdc Power factor correction capacitors are being used on Remove the power factor correc the input or output to the tion capacitors Drive D phase onithe input Check the input voltage Input Phase Loss Tighten the terminal screws PF Drive input power supply has an open phase Input Pha Loss or has a large imbalance of voltage Momentary power loss Detected when L8 05 1 enabled occurred Check the input voltage voltage fluctuation too Check the input voltage There was a break in the PG Fix the broken disconnected wir wiring ing PG Disconnection Detected when F1 02 0 to 2 and 1 02 The PG was wired incorrectly 1 or 3 Detected when no PG encoder pulses Power wasn t bein
142. ange 0 to 200 0 to 100 Factory Setting Flux Vector 12096 30 to 200 Parameter No Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Speed Agreement Detection Level Spd Agree Level Speed Agreement Detection Width Spd Agree Width Speed Agreement Detection Level Spd Agree Level Speed Agreement Detection Width Spd Agree Width Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection Ref Loss Sel Frequency Reference Level at Loss Frequency Fref at Floss Number of Auto Restart Attempts Num of Restarts Auto Restart Operation Selection Restart Sel Table A1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Flux Vector Setting Range Factory Description Setting Loop Vector Reference Detection These parameters configure the multi function output 2 00 settings Fref fout agree 1 Fref set agree 1 Frequency detection 1 and Frequency detection 2 They are used as a setpoint and hysteresis for a contact closure for the functions 400 0 to 400 0 0 0 to 20 0 0 to 100 0 These parameters configure the multi function output 2 00 settings Fref fout agree 2 Fref set agree 2 Frequency detection 3 or Frequency detection 4 It is used as a setpoint and hysteresis for a contact closure for the functions listed above Determines how the drive will react when the frequency reference is lost The frequency reference is considered lost w
143. applicable codes Refer to the specification Failure to do so may result in equipment damage and or per sonal injury Do not connect unapproved LC or RC interference suppression filters capacitors or overvoltage protection devices to the output of the Drive These devices may generate peak currents that exceed Drive specifications To avoid unnecessary fault displays caused by contactors or output switches placed between Drive and motor auxiliary contacts must be properly integrated into the control logic circuit YASKAWA is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user doing so will void the warranty This product must not be modified Verify that the rated voltage of the Drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power To meet CE directives proper line filters and proper installation are required Some drawings in this manual may be shown with protective covers or shields removed to describe details These must be replaced before operation Observe electrostatic discharge procedures when handling circuit boards to prevent ESD damage The equipment may start unexpectedly upon application of power Clear all personnel from the drive motor and machine area before applying power Secure covers couplings shaft keys and machine loads before energizing the Drive Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts The operating company is responsible fo
144. application from the initial start up 3 Press the MENU key once to display Operation Press the DATA ENTER key to display Frequency Ref If using a remote speed command press the LOCAL REMOTE key so the REMOTE SEQ and REMOTE REF indicators are on This puts the Drive in REMOTE mode StatUp 4 15 4 Ifusing an external speed command determine whether the speed command is a 0 10Vdc or a 4 20mA signal Connect the positive side of a 0 10Vdc signal to terminal A1 Connect the positive side of a 4 20mA signal to termi nal A2 Connect the COMMON of the speed command to terminal AC Note Connect only one input The factory default is 0 10Vdc To change to 4 20mA adjust parameter H3 08 to 2 4 20mA and ensure DIP Switch 51 2 located on the terminal board is in the ON position 5 Check the signal for proper polarity Observe if the speed command can achieve the minimum and maximum speeds desired If not perform the following For 0 10Vdc input Terminal A1 1 With no input adjust Bias H3 03 setting until an output of 0 0 HZ is obtained 2 With full scale input adjust Gain H3 02 setting until an output of 60 0 Hz or other desired maximum frequency is obtained For 4 20mA input Terminal A2 1 With 4mA input adjust Bias H3 11 setting until an output of 0 0 Hz is obtained 2 With 20 mA input adjust Gain H3 10 setting until an output of 60 0 Hz or other desired maximum frequency
145. ard V F pattern for a 60Hz motor is 1 60 Hz Saturation Set the Drive to Local control Press the MENU key once to display the Operation menu Then press DATA ENTER to display Frequency Reference Press the LOCAL REMOTE key once This puts the Drive in the Local Mode allowing run stop and speed commands by the digital operator The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off and the FWD light turns on A WARNING THE NEXT KEY PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO ROTATE TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS Check the motor rotation Press and hold the JOG key to check motor rotation The RUN light turns on and the STOP light is off Frequency Ref U1 01 now displays 6 00Hz on the Digital Operator The frequency reference for this operation comes from parameter 41 17 Jog Reference with factory default setting of 6 00Hz The motor should ramp up to speed If the motor rotation is incorrect swap any two motor leads U T1 V T2 W T3 on the Drive terminal and repeat the motor rotation check Proceed to the Auto Tuning section StartUp 4 6 V F w PG Startup 1 8 See Drive Start Up Procedures on Page 4 5 9 Apply input power to the Drive O 10 Set the control method of the drive to V F w PG Feedback Control by pressing the MENU key twice for the Quick Setting menu Press the ENTER key to display A1 02 Control Method Use the UP and DOWN keys and the DATA ENTER key to set this parameter to 1 V F w PG Fdbk Ensure
146. ble Stall prevention during deceleration enabled is set When a braking resistor is connected set parameter L3 04 Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration to 0 disabled or 3 with braking resistor When this parameter is set to 1 enabled factory default the stall prevention function will interfere with the braking resistor The deceleration time setting is too long Check the active deceleration time setting parameters C1 02 C1 04 C1 06 or C1 08 Motor torque is insufficient If the parameters are correct and there is no overvoltage fault then the motor s power may be insufficient Consider increasing the motor and Drive s capacity The torque limit has been reached When a torque limit is reached L7 01 to 17 04 the motor torque will be limited This can cause the deceleration time to be extended Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable If a torque limit has been set for the multi function analog input terminals A2 or A3 parameters H3 09 or H3 05 set value 10 11 12 or 15 check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable If the Vertical axis Load Drops Droops When a Mechanical Brake is Applied The brake sequence is incorrect To ensure that the brake holds set frequency detection 2 H2 01 5 for the multi function contact output terminals M1 and M2 so that the contacts will turn OFF when the output frequency is greater than L4 01 3 0 to 5 0 Hz The
147. ble Closed Drive will accept run command Open Drive will not run If running drive will stop per b1 03 71 Speed Torque Control Selection Closed Torque control operation Open Speed control operation 72 Zero Servo Command Closed Zero Servo ON 77 ASR 2 Selection Closed ASR proportional gain and integral time is set according to C5 03 and 5 04 78 Polarity Reversing Command for External Torque Control Closed Reverse polarity Parameters A 23 Setting Range Factory Setting Control Method Open Loop Vector Flux Vector Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display D soription Range Setting Flux Vector Digital Outputs Selects the function of terminals M1 to M6 0 During RUN 1 Closed When a run command is input or the drive is outputting voltage 1 Zero Speed Closed When drive output frequency is less than minimum output frequency 1 09 2 Fref Fout Agree 1 Closed When drive output frequency equals the frequency reference bandwidth of L4 02 3 Fref Set Agree 1 Closed When the drive output frequency and the frequency reference are equal to the value in L4 01 bandwidth of L4 02 4 Frequency Detection 1 Closed When the drive output frequency is less than or equal to the value in L4 01 with hysteresis determined by L4 02 5 Frequency Detection 2 Closed When the dr
148. cation Serial communication can be performed with Program Logic Controllers PLCs or similar master devices using the Modbus protocol Modbus Communication Configuration Modbus communication is configured using 1 master PLC and a maximum of 31 slaves Serial communication between mas ter and slave is normally initiated by the master and responded to by the slaves The master performs serial communication with one slave at a time Consequently the slave address of each slave must be initially set so that the master can perform serial communication using that address Slaves receiving commands from the mas ter perform the specified functions and send a response back to the master Master Fig D 1 Example of Connections between Master and Drive Communication Specifications The Modbus communication specifications are shown below Table D 1 Modbus Communication Specifications Specifications Interface RS 422 RS 485 Communications Cycle Asynchronous Start stop synchronization Baud rate Select from 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 bps Datalength 8 bits fixed Communications Parameters Parity Select from even odd or none Stop bits bit selected Communications Protocol Modbus RTU Number of Connectable Units 3 units maximum Communications D 2 Communication Connection Terminal Modbus communication uses the following ter
149. causing the Drive to overheat Physical Installation 1 11 Installation Orientation and Clearances Install the Drive vertically so as not to reduce the cooling efficiency When installing the Drive always provide the following installation clearances to allow normal heat dissipation and air flow Ensure that the heatsink is against a closed surface to avoid diverting cooling air around the heatsink 1 97 in 50 mm minimum 4 75 in 120 mm minimum 12in 5mm ko mm minimum 75 in 120 mm minimum Horizontal Clearance Vertical Clearance Drive models F7U2110 F7U4160 F7U4220 this clearance dimension is 4 75 120 mm minimum For Drive model F7U4300 this clearance dimension is 11 8 in 300 mm minimum Fig 1 8 Drive Installation Orientation and Clearance 1 The same clearance is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis IPOO and NEMA Type 1 Drives IMPORTANT 2 Always remove the top and bottom protection covers before installing a CIMR F7U2018 4018 and smaller Drive in a panel 3 Always provide enough clearance for lifting eye bolts and the main circuit wiring when installing a CIMR F7U2022 4030 and larger Drive in a panel Physical Installation 1 12 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover Remove the terminal cover to connect cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals Removing the Terminal Cover Models CIMR F7U20P
150. ce on top 2 Remove the Remote Mount Resistor Unit cover to access its terminal block Connect the Remote Mount Resistor Unit to the drive and to external control circuitry according to figure below Table 2 8 Wire Size for Remote Mount Resistor Unit wm s o Wire Size AWG Wire Type 600V Ethylene propylene rubber insulated or equivalent Terminal Screw 4 Power Leads for the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generate high levels of electrical noise these signal leads must be grouped separately u MOUNT RESISTOR UNIT PAAT OF LIBER SUPPLIED THR 1 EXTERMAL CIRCUIT POWER ET THERA L 945 Fig 2 8 Wiring Remote Mount Resistor Unit Installation for F7U20P4 thru F7U2018 and F7U40P4 thru F7U4018 3 Reinstall and secure Remote Mount Resistor Unit cover and drive front cover 4 Proceed to Adjustments section on Page 2 20 Electrical Installation 2 16 Braking Transistor Unit s and Remote Mount Resistor Unit s Installation 2712022 thru F7U2110 F7U4022 thru F7U4300 Since the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generates heat during dynamic braking operation install it in a location away from other equipment Select Mounting locations for Braking Transistor Unit s and Remote Mount Resistor Unit s so that wiring between the drive and the Master Braking Transistor Unit and between each Braking Tra
151. celeration time 0 0 to 6000 0 s 4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings Internal braking torque Approximately 20 Main control functions Restarting from momentary power loss bi directional speed search overtorque undertorque detection 17 preset speeds acceleration deceleration time changes S curve acceleration 3 wire sequence auto tuning cooling fan ON OFF control torque compensation speed control torque control switch jump frequencies upper and lower limits for frequency references DC braking for starting and stopping high slip braking PID control with sleep function energy saving control Modbus communications RS 485 422 19 2 kbps maximum fault reset and copy function Protective Functions Motor protection UL recognized electronic thermal overload relay PT Instantaneous overcurrent protection Stops at approximately 200 of rated output current Main circuit protection Fuse in DC bus circuit Overload protection Normal Duty C6 01 2 Approximately 110 of rated output current for 60 seconds Heavy Duty C6 01 0 150 of rated output current for 60 seconds Overvoltage protection 208 240 Stops when main circuit DC voltage is above 410 Vdc 480Vac Stops when main circuit DC voltage is above 820 Vdc Undervoltage protection 208 240Vac Stops when main circuit DC voltage is below 190 Vdc 480Vac Stops when main circu
152. chnical manuals FAQs instruction sheets and software downloads are available at our website WWW drives com When calling for technical support please have the following materials available e appropriate Technical Manual in hand because the support associate may refer to this e Complete nameplate information from the drive and the motor Confirm that Drive Nameplate Output amps is greater than Motor Nameplate amps e list with your parameter settings sketch of the electrical powertrain from AC line to motor including filters and disconnects Field Service Start Up Assistance Factory Repair Replacement Parts and Other Support Contact Drives Technical Support for help with any of these needs Technical Training Training is conducted at Yaskawa training centers at customer sites and via the internet For information visit www drives com or call 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 From the phone menu dial 2 for Inverter and Drive Products then 4 for Product Training Support in Other Countries Yaskawa is a multi national company with offices and service representation around the world To obtain support always contact the local distributor first for guidance and assistance Contact the closest Yaskawa office listed for further assistance F7 Drive YASKAWA YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA INC Drives Division 16555 W Ryerson Rd New Berlin WI 53151 U S A Phone 800 YASKAWA 800 927 5292 Fax 262 782 34
153. ction for self diagnosing the operations of the serial communication interface circuits The self diagnosis function tests the serial communications hardware of the Drive by jumpers the send and receive terminals to receive the same message as the Drive sends Perform the self diagnosis function using the following procedure 1 Turn ON the power supply to the Drive and set parameter H1 06 Terminal S8 function selection to 67 communication test mode 2 Turn OFF the power supply to the Drive 3 Jumper the following terminals while the power supply is turned OFF see diagram below connect S to R connect S to R connect S8 to SC 4 Turn ON the terminating resistor Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1 5 Turn ON the power supply to the Drive again Fig D 10 Communication Terminal Connection for Self Diagnosis Function 6 During normal self diagnostic operation the Digital Operator displays the frequency reference value If an error occurs a CE Modbus communication error alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator the fault contact output will be turned ON and the Drive operation ready signal will be turned OFF Communications D 18 Notes Communications D 19 Communications D 20 Appendix Peripheral Devices This appendix describes recommended branch short circuit protection and peripheral devices Branch Short Circuit
154. d 1 D Feedback 2 D Feed Forward ous 0 3 Freq Ref PID output D Feedback 4 Freq Ref PID output D Feed Forward 55 02 Proportional Gain Setting 0 00 to PID Gain Sets the proportional gain of the PID controller 25 00 1 00 55 03 Intregral Time Setting PID I Time b5 04 Intregral Limit Setting PID I Limit 55 05 Derivative Time PID D Time b5 06 PID Output Limit PID Limit Sets the integral time for the PID controller A setting of zero 0 0 to LOsec A A A A disables integral control 360 0 Sets the maximum output possible from the integrator Set as a 0 0 to 100 of maximum frequency 100 0 Sets D control derivative time A setting of 0 00 disables 0 00 to 0 00sec A A A A derivative control 10 00 Sets the maximum output possible from the entire PID controller 0 00 to 100 0 A A A A Set as a of maximum frequency 100 0 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 6 Parameter No 55 07 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 b b b b b b b b b 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Parameter Name Digital Operator Display PID Offset Adjustment PID Offset PID Primary Delay Time Constant PID Delay Time PID Output Level Selection Output Level Sel Table A1 F7 Parameter List Continued Description Sets the amount of offset of the output of the PID controller Set as a of maximum frequency
155. d will display Tune Successful O 4 Proceed to the Quick Setting Parameters section StartUp 4 11 Quick Setting Parameters The following Drive parameters located in the Quick Setting menu need to be set according to the application Refer to Chapter 5 Basic Programming section for more details on each parameter Note Not all parameters are available for all Control Modes See Control Mode column Control Mode Setting Factory Range Setting Parameter Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Selects the control mode of the drive Control Method Selection 0 V f control without PG Control Method 1 control with PG 0 to 3 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector Closed Loop Vector Selects the frequency reference input source 0 Operator Digital preset speed U1 01 or 41 01 to 41 17 Frequency Reference 1 Terminals Analog Input Terminal 1 or Terminal A2 see Selection parameter H3 13 0 to 4 Reference Source 2 Serial Com Modbus RS 422 485 terminals R R S and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected on 2CN 4 Pulse Input Description FV Selects the run command input source R n Command Selection 0 Operator RUN and STOP keys on digital operator RunS 1 Terminals Contact closure on terminals S1 or S2 0to3 Ades 2 Serial Com Modbus RS 422 485 terminals R S and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected on 2CN Selects the stopping method when the run command is removed 0 Ramp to
156. deceleration will stop Deceleration will continue once the DC bus level drops below the stall prevention level 2 Intelligent The active deceleration rate is ignored and the drive decelerates as fast as possible w o hitting OV fault level 3 Stall Prevention w Braking Resister Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running StartUp 4 14 Trial Run 1 Press the LOCAL REMOTE key once This puts the Drive in the Local Mode allowing run stop and speed com mands by the digital operator The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off and the FWD light turns on 2 Run the Drive at different frequencies and record monitor values With the drive in Local Mode press the ENTER key at Frequency Reference Monitor U1 01 Use the UP DOWN and RESET keys to set the frequency reference Then press the DATA ENTER key to accept the frequency reference entered Run the Drive at the set frequency ref erence by pressing the RUN key Use the UP and DOWN keys to view Output Current U1 03 Output Voltage U1 06 and DC Bus Voltage U1 07 while running the Drive throughout its entire speed range Record the follow ing information at each speed Frequency Output Current Output Voltage DC Bus Voltage Hz A VAC Vdc Monitor U1 01 Monitor U1 03 Monitor U1 06 Monitor U1 07 When this table is complete press the STOP key The Drive will stop and the FWD light remains on This step provides benchmark data for the
157. direction of arrow 1 to unlock then lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove it as shown in Fig 1 11 Fig 1 11 Removing the Digital Operator iRemoving the Front Cover Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the direction of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of cover in the direction of arrow 2 to remove it as shown in Fig 1 12 Fig 1 12 Removing the Front Cover E Mounting the Front Cover Mount the front cover to the Drive by performing the steps to remove the front cover in reverse order 1 Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached as this may cause the Digital Operator to malfunction due to improper mating with its connector 2 Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Drive and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Drive until it snaps into place Physical Installation 1 14 B Mounting the Digital Operator After attaching the front cover mount the Digital Operator onto the Drive using the following procedure 1 Hook the Digital Operator at A two locations on the left side of the opening on the front cover by moving in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration 2 Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B two locations Fig 1 13 Mounting the Digital Operator 1 Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator and do not mount or remove
158. doesn t change when the motor shaft is rotated check the encoder wiring and connections If the polarity is wrong swap and wires terminals 4 and 5 on the PG X2 16 Set the Drive to Local control Press the MENU key once to display the Operation menu Then press DATA ENTER to display Frequency Reference Press the LOCAL REMOTE key once This puts the Drive in the Local Mode allowing run stop and speed commands by the digital operator The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off and the FWD light turns on a Display monitor U1 01 Frequency Ref in the Operation menu StartUp 4 7 O 18 O 19 AWARNING THE NEXT KEY PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO ROTATE TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS Check the motor rotation Press and hold the JOG key to check motor rotation The RUN light turns on and the STOP light is off U1 01 Frequency Ref now displays 6 00Hz on the Digital Operator The frequency reference for this operation comes from parameter d1 17 Jog Reference with factory default setting of 6 00Hz The motor should ramp up to speed If the motor rotation is incorrect swap any two motor leads U T1 V T2 W T3 on the Drive terminal and repeat the motor rotation check The encoder phasing polarity may also need to be reversed Proceed to the Auto Tuning section Open Loop Vector Startup 1 8 See Drive Start Up Procedures Page 4 5 Apply input power to the Drive Set the
159. e 90H Start Higher 00H Start Higher 00H Error code 02H Address Lower 01H Address Lower 01H 16 Higher CDH Higher 00H Higher 00H Lower Quantity Quantity Lower 02H Lower 02H No of data 04H Higher 10H 16 Higher 00H Lower 08H Lead data Lower 01H Higher 02H Next data i Lower 58H No of data 2 x quantity High 63H CROSS ET Lower 39H Fig D 9 Function Code 10H Message Example Communications D 9 Modbus Data Tables The data tables are shown below The types of data are as follows Reference data monitor data broadcast data and parameter data Reference Data The reference data table is shown below Reference data can be read and written to Table D 4 Reference Data Register No Reserved Input terminal status Bit 0 Run stop command Run 1 Stop 0 Bit 1 Forward reverse operation Reverse 1 Forward 0 Bit 2 External fault Fault EFO 1 Bit 3 Fault reset Reset command 1 Bit 4 ComNet Bit 5 ComCtrl Bit 6 Multi function digital input command 3 terminal S3 Bit 7 Multi function digital input command 4 terminal S4 Bit 8 Multi function digital input command 5 terminal S5 Bit 9 Multi function digital input command 6 terminal S6 Bit A Multi function digital input command 7 terminal S7 Bit B Multi function digital input command 8 terminal S8 Bits C to F Not used 0002H Frequency reference Set units usi
160. e digit to be changed The selected digit will blink SHIFT RESET Also resets the Drive when a fault has occurred The run command must be removed before the reset command will be accepted DATA ENTER Enter menus and parameters as well as to set values Starts Drive operation when the Drive is being controlled by the Digital Operator LOCAL Stops Drive operation STOP Key This key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the external terminal or communications by setting user parameter 02 02 Digital Operator 3 3 Drive Mode Indicators The definition of the Drive mode indicators are shown in Table 3 2 Table 3 2 Drive Mode Indicators FW Lit when a forward run command is input R is i Lit when a reverse run command is input REMOTE SEQ See Table 3 3 REMOTE REF See Table 3 4 Lit when a fault has occurred Flashes when an Alarm has occurred REMOTE Sequence SEQ Indicator The status of the REMOTE Sequence SEQ indicator is shown in Table 3 3 This indicator is always when the Drive is in the LOCAL mode When the Drive is in the REMOTE mode the SEQ indicator status is dependent on the setting of parameter b1 02 Run Command Selection See Table 3 3 Table 3 3 REMOTE Sequence SEQ Indicator Parameter b1 02 Run Command Selection is set to digital operator as indicated below b1 02 0 Operator Parameter b1 02 Run Command Selection is set
161. e load Lengthen the acceleration and deceleration times Check the mechanical system Check the settings in F1 10 and FI 11 Check the input terminal programmed for enable command Apply and maintain the enable command before applying the run command Check external sequence logic so only one input is received at a time Check for an external condition Verify the parameters Verify communication signal Table 6 2 Alarm Displays and Processing continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action EF3 Ext Fault 53 Flashing EF4 Ext Fault 54 Flashing EF5 Ext Fault S5 External Fault at Terminal S3 S8 Flashing Detected when terminals 53 S8 H1 01 to An external fault condition H1 06 are programmed for external fault exists that was connected to a EF6 function that alarms only and continues to multi function digital input Eliminate the cause of an external fault condition Ext Fault S6 run the Drive Flashing EF7 Ext Fault 57 Flashing EF8 Ext Fault 58 Flashing SI F G Communications Error Detected 15 E error 15 Check the communications run command or frequency reference is set SI F G Com Err signals from an Option Card and continuous opera tion is set for the E 15 operation selection PID Feedback Loss Verify Drive is programmed to This alarm occurs when PID Feedback Loss PID Feedback source receive the PI
162. e pulse train moni Oto Pulse Moni Scale 32000 tor output synchronously to the output frequency H6 06 Pulse Train Monitor Select the pulse train monitor output terminal MP function value Selection of the OO part of 01 00 See Table A2 for the list of U1 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 30 0 10sec Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Parameter No L1 05 L2 01 L2 02 L2 03 L2 04 L2 05 Level PUV Det Level KEB Deceleration Rate 12 06 KEB Decl Rate L2 07 L2 08 Description Motor Overload Sets the motor thermal overload protection OL1 based on the cooling capacity of the motor 0 Disabled 1 Standard Fan Cooled lt 10 1 motor 2 Standard Blower Cooled gt 10 1 motor 3 Vector Motor 1000 1 motor Motor Overload Protection Selection MOL Fault Selection Motor Overload Protection Time MOL Time Constant Sets the motor thermal overload protection OL1 time A larger L1 02 time will increase the time before an OL1 fault will occur Sets operation selection when the motor temperature analog input H3 09 E exceeds the OH3 alarm level 1 17V 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only Motor Overheat Alarm Operation Selection Motor OH Alarm Selection Sets stopping method when the motor temperature analog input H3 09 E exceeds the OH4 fault level 2 34V 0 Ra
163. ected prohibited frequency reference point A setting of 1 0 will result in a deadband of 1 0 Hz bo Sequence MOP amp Trim Control This parameter is used to retain the held frequency reference in U1 01 41 01 when power is removed This function is available Frequency Reference Hold e P DTE 4 when the multi function inputs accel decel ramp hold or up Function Selection m Otol down commands are selected H1 XX A or 10 and 11 MOP Ref Memory 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Sets the amount of frequency reference to be added or subtracted as d4 02 Trim Control Level a percentage of maximum output frequency E1 04 when multi Oto 100 10 Trim Control Lvl function inputs trim control increase and trim control decrease are selected H1 XX 1C and 1D EE Torque Control Jump Frequency Width Jump Bandwidth Selects speed or torque control The torque reference is set via analog input A2 or A3 when it is set for torque reference H3 05 or H3 09 13 Torque reference is Torque Control Selection set as a percentage of motor rated torque d5 01 dur Control Sel To use the function for switching between speed and torque Otol 4 control set to 0 and set a multi function input to speed torque control change H1 XX 71 0 Speed Control controlled by C5 01 to C5 07 1 Torque Control Sets the torque reference delay time in ms units Torque Reference Delay ME This function
164. ected when F1 04 3 and 1 02 1 or 3 The speed deviation is greater than the set ting in 1 10 for longer than the setting in 1 11 Detected when a multi function digital input 1 01 to H1 06 is programmed for 6A Drive enable The Drive does not have the enable command when the run command is applied This alarm stops the motor Both the forward and the reverse run commands are input simultaneously for 500ms or more This alarm stops the motor Communication Option Card External Fault Cause Connection is broken master controller has stopped communicating Connection was not made properly or user software was not configured to the proper baud rate or configuration Normal communication was not possible for 2 seconds or longer after control data was received The load was too large The acceleration time and deceleration times were too short The load was locked The settings in F1 10 and F1 11 were not appropriate Enable command was lost while Drive was running The Run command was applied prior to the enable signal An external forward and reverse command were input simultaneously An external fault condition was present Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 9 Corrective Action Check all connections verify all user side software configurations Check all connections verify all user side software configurations Check the communications devices and signals Reduce th
165. ection CarrierFreq Sel Carrier Frequency Upper Limit CarrierFreq Max Carrier Frequency Lower Limit CarrierFreq Min Carrier Frequency Propor tional Gain CarrierFreq Gain Table A1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Setting Factory Description Open Range Setting Loop Vector ASR Tuning 7 0 00 to Sets the proportional gain of the speed control loop ASR 300 00 20 00 Sets the integral time of the speed control loop ASR Een oe Sets the speed control gain 2 and integral time 2 of the speed control loop ASR 0 00 to 300 00 2000 Flux Vector P I C5 01 02 C5 03 04 H o a c5 07 7 V fw ith PG 0 000 to 0 500 A A 10 000 sec Sets the upper limit for the speed control loop ASR as a 0 0 to 5 0 percentage of the maximum output frequency 2 04 20 0 Sets the filter time constant for the time from the speed loop to the 0 000 to 0 004 A torque command output 0 500 sec Sets the frequency for switching between Proportion Gain 1 2 and 0 0 to Integral Time 1 2 400 0 Sets the ASR integral upper limit and rated load as a percentage of 0 to 400 400 A maximum output frequency E2 04 Carrier Frequency Selects Drive s rated input and output current overload capacity carrier frequency current limit and maximum output frequency See Introduction for details 0 Heavy Duty C6 02 0 to 1 1 Normal Duty 1 C6 02 0 to F 2 Normal Duty 2 C6 02 0 to F Selects the n
166. ee s r of ane Average 40 CDBR 4220B 840ohm 500A 152 01250 46 3 of 250HP Braking __4of CDBR 4220B 8 40 50 0A TL 26 OF BOOHP 38 5 of 300HP ee 5 of CDBR4220B 8 40 ohm 500A 18 0 400 36 0 of 400HP 6 of CDBR 42208 amp 40ohm 640 71 777 148 0 500 42 9 of SOOHP 1of CDBR 4045B 18 0 085A 152 OF 0 __ 6 2 Duty lof CDBR 4045B 1360hm 116A 151 of 4OHP 6 5 of 40HP 480VAC 2of CDBR 4045B 180 085A 82 OF SOHP 74 2of CDBR 4045B 180ohm 0 56 51 OF GOHP 6 1 of 6OHP 2of CDBR 4045B 13 6 1 44 159 75 __ tof CDBR 4220B 420ohm 360A CT 92 Of 100HP tof CDBR 4220B 4 20 3 04 053 125 16 1 OF 125HP_ __ tof CDBR 4220B 320ohm 460A t67 6of 150HP 6 3 01150 tof CDBR 4220B_ 320 460A and 1 of 4045 13 6 11 6 154 of sof CDBR42208 820ohm a60 48 500 150 Braking Power 6 Average Braking Power Fig 2 6 480V Rated Braking Transistor and Resistor Units Electrical Installation 2 14 B Installation This option should only be installed by a technically qualified individual who is familiar with this type of equipment and the hazards involved A WARNING Hazardous voltages can cause severe injury or death Lock all power sources feeding the
167. er lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal R L1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal S L2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal T L3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal R L1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal S L2 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal T L3 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Input Diodes 01 012 or Q1 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 26 Table 6 6 Main Circuit Test Procedure continued 11 Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal R L1 Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Input Diodes Place the negative black meter lead on terminal S L2 D1 D12 or Q1 Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black me
168. er method See Fig 2 28 PG X2 5 NN DW gt gt cea gt AAT WD supply OV 12V l OV _ Capacitor for momentary SONY power loss TOWN Fig 2 28 PG X2 Connection Example For External 12V PG Power Supply Electrical Installation 2 45 Notes Electrical Installation 2 46 Chapter 3 Digital Operator This chapter describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator Digital Operator 3 2 Digital Operator Keys 3 3 Drive Mode 3 4 3 6 Quick Setting 0 0 3 11 Programming eee 3 12 Example of Changing a Parameter 3 15 Digital Operator 3 1 Digital Operator Display The Digital Operator is used for programming operating and monitoring the drive The various items included on the Digital Operator are described below Menu Display d DRIVE Frequency Ref 1 60 00Hz 01 02 60 00Hz U1 03 10 05A lt a Drive Mode Indicators See Table 3 2 54 Ready Display Drive can operate when a drive command is input 4 Data Display Displays monitor data parameter data and settings
169. erates at the active decelera tion rate but if the main circuit DC bus voltage reaches the stall prevention level 380 760 Vdc deceleration will stop Deceleration will continue once the DC bus level drops below the stall prevention level 2 Intelligent The active deceleration rate is ignored and the drive decelerates as fast as possible w o hitting OV fault level Range 1 02 10 3 Stall Prevention w Braking Resitor Selects the stall prevention method to use to prevent Drive faults during run 0 Disabled Drive runs a set frequency A heavy load may cause the drive to trip on an OC or OL fault 1 Decel Time 1 In order to avoid stalling during heavy loading the drive will decelerate at Decel time 1 C1 02 if the output current exceeds the level set by L3 06 Once the current level drops below the L3 06 level the drive will accelerate back to its frequency reference at the active acceleration rate 2 Decel Time 2 Same as setting 1 except the drive decelerates at Decel Time 2 C1 04 When output frequency is 6Hz or less stall prevention during running is disabled regardless of L3 05 setting This parameter is enabled when L3 05 is set to 1 or 2 Drive rated current is set as 100 Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current occurs at factory setting Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 32 Control Method Open Loop Vector Setting R
170. erator and Front COVEN 1 14 Physical Installation 1 1 7 Model Number Enclosure Heat Loss Weight Table 1 1 F7 Model Number and Enclosure Style F7 EnclosureStyle Weight Model Number y Ibs Heatsink CIMR F7U20P41E NEMA 1 IP20 CIMR F7U20P71E NEMA Type 1 IP20 CIMR F7U21P51E NEMA 1 IP20 CIMR F7U22P21E NEMA 1 IP20 208 240 Vac HeatLoss watts Internal CIMR F7U23P71E NEMA 1 IP20 CIMR F7U25P51E NEMA Type 1 IP20 CIMR F7U27P51E NEMA Type 1 IP20 13 2 CIMR F7U20111E NEMA 1 IP20 15 4 UA oo CIMR F7U20151E NEMA Type 1 IP20 2 CIMR F7U20181E NEMA Type 1 IP20 oo CIMR F7U20221E NEMA Type 1 IP20 CIMR F7U20301E NEMA Type 1 IP20 CIMR F7U20370E Open Chassis 00 12 1010 psi CIMR F7U20550E Open Chassis 00 CIMR F7U20750E Open Chassis 00 N CIMR F7U20900E Open Chassis 00 CIMR F7U21100E Open Chassis 00 3 oo Az N oo A Q2 7 CIMIR FTUAOISIE CIMICFTUADISIE CIMR F7040221E CIMR FTUADSOIE CIMICFTUADSTIE IMRT ss CIMR FTUAOSSIE CIMR FTUAOTS0E CIMR FTUETTOOE CIMR FIUSTS20E CIMR FTUAT00E CIMICFTUATSSOE CIMR FTU42200 U HDi anys MN Oo ar 3 8 1133 1287 1682 1847 2287 2736 3393 3935 3964 5509 83
171. erence at various frequencies The power leads pass this on to the surrounding environment like an antenna Connecting an item of electrical equipment e g Drive to a supply without a line filter can allow High Frequency HF or Low Frequency LF interference to penetrate the power distribution system The basic countermeasures are isolation of the wiring of control and power components proper grounding and shielding of cables A large contact area is necessary for low impedance grounding of HF interference The use of grounding straps instead of cables is therefore highly recommended Cable shields must be connected with ground clips Cable Installation Measures against line borne interference Use a power cable with a well grounded shield Use a shielded motor cable not exceeding 82 feet 25 m in length Arrange all grounds to maximize the end of the lead area in contact with ground e g metal plate Use a shielded cable with braided shield and ground the maximum possible area of the shield It is advisable to ground the shield by connecting the cable to the ground plate with metal clips see Fig 2 18 Ground clip Ground plate Fig 2 18 Grounding Surface Layout The grounding surfaces must be highly conductive bare metal Remove any varnish or paint from grounding surfaces Be sure to ground the motor of the machine application Electrical Installation 2 30 Line filter and Drive must be mounted on the same metal plate
172. ermine if special programming is required for the following refer to Appendix A Multi function Inputs Multi function Outputs Multi function Digital Inputs Multi function Analog Outputs Serial Communications THIS COMPLETES THE DRIVE START UP PREPARATION StatUp 4 4 Drive Start Up Procedures O 1 Confirm that all three phases are present and that the input voltage is correct for the Drive being set up Measure the voltage on the line side of the Drive s Molded Case Circuit Breaker disconnect and record below Table 4 1 Input Voltage Check Measurement Location Voltage Vac 11 12 11 13 O 2 Ifthe voltage level is within the Drive s specification APPLY POWER to energize the Drive The STOP AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators should be lit on the keypad O 3 REMOVE POWER from the Drive Wait for the Red CHARGE LED near the power terminals to go out 4 Connect the motor leads to the Drive at terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 O 5 APPLY POWER to the Drive 6 Determine the proper control method for the application V F Control V F with PG Control Open Loop Vector or Flux Vector Control O 7 Ifthe selected control method requires a PG encoder on the motor V F with PG Control and Flux Vector Control verify that the proper PG card is installed in the Drive and that all encoder wiring is correct Check the line driver type 8830 88C30 output levels quadrature A A B B etc and encoder
173. ers Disable Integral I and Derivative time D control Reduce the proportional gain P until hunting stops Reintroduce the integral function starting with long integral time values to eliminate the P offset Reintroduce the derivative time and adjust with small increments to eliminate oscillation Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 24 If the Motor Rotates Even When Drive Output is Stopped If the motor rotates even when the Drive is stopped due to a large internal load DC injection braking may be necessary Adjust the DC injection braking as follows Increase parameter b2 04 DC Injection Braking initial excitation Time at Stop Increase parameter b2 02 DC Injection Braking Current 1f Output Frequency Does Not Rise to the Frequency Reference Use the following information if the output frequency does not match the frequency reference BThe frequency reference is within the jump frequency range When the jump frequency function is used the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency range Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency d3 01 to d3 03 and Jump Frequency Width d3 04 settings are suitable BThe frequency reference upper limit has been reached The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula Freq Ref Upper Limit Maximum Output Frequency E1 04 x Frequency Reference Upper Limit d2 01 100 Check to be sure that the parameter E1 04 and d2 01
174. ers Representative Printed Name Phone Company Signature Step 1 The Drive is thoroughly tested at the factory The start up person should verify that the drive is free of shipping and installation damage Shipping damage is not covered by the Yaskawa warranty Claims must be filed with the shipping company as soon as possible for any potential recovery via insurance Review the F7 User Manual TM F7 01 shipped with the Drive Verify that the model number and voltage ratings in the purchase order match the nameplate data for each unit Location of the Drive is important to achieve proper performance and normal operating life The unit should be installed in an area where it is protected from Direct sunlight rain or moisture Corrosive gases or liquids Vibration airborne dust or metallic particles Ensure the Drive is on a vertical surface with adequate space for air circulation 4 75 above and below 1 2 on each side Refer to Fig 1 8 Verify that the proper branch circuit protection is installed in front of the Drive Refer to Appendix E Peripheral Devices for proper input fuse or circuit breaker sizing StatUp 4 2 Avoid running input and output wiring in the same conduit Avoid routing power wiring near equipment sensitive to electrical noise Never allow wire leads to touch metal surfaces Short circuit may result Never connect AC main power to output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 Ne
175. es no liability for any personal injury property damage losses or claims arising from misapplication of its products A WARNING Read and understand this manual before installing operating or servicing this Drive All warnings cautions and instructions must be followed All activity must be performed by qualified personnel The Drive must be installed according to this manual and local codes Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on Do not remove or insert the digital operator while power is on Before servicing disconnect all power to the equipment The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc To prevent electric shock wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the unit This equipment uses sensitive devices and may be damaged by high voltage A WARNING The Drive is suitable for circuits capable of delivering not more than 100 000 RMS symmetrical Amperes 240 Vac maximum 240 V Class and 480 Vac maximum 480 V Class when protected by a circuit breaker or fuses having an interrupting rating not less than 100 000 RMS symmetrical Amperes 600 Vac maximum Install adequate branch short cir cuit protection per
176. eter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Doserptiah Range Setting M nic Flux Vector Vector 11 Reset Command Active Closed When the drive receives a reset command from a digital input terminal or serial communication 12 Timer Output Output for independant timer controlled by b4 01 and b4 02 Used in conjunction with the digital input timer function 13 Fref Fout Agree 2 Closed When drive output frequency equals the frequency reference bandwidth of L4 04 14 Fref Set Agree 2 Closed When the drive output frequency and the frequency reference are equal to the value in L4 03 bandwidth of L4 04 15 Frequency Detection 3 Terminal M3 M4 Function Closed When the drive output frequency is less than or equal Selection to the value in L4 03 with the hysteresis determined by L4 04 0 to 38 1 A A A A Term 3 4 Sel 16 Frequency Detection 4 Closed When the drive output speed is greater than or equal to the value in L4 03 with the hysteresis determined by L4 04 17 Torque Detection 1 N C Open When the output current torque exceeds the value set in parameter L6 02 for more time than is set in parameter L6 03 18 Torque Detection 2 N O Closed When the output current torque exceeds the value set in parameter L6 05 for more time than is set in parameter L6 06 19 Torque Detection 2 N C Open when the output current torque exceeds the value set in
177. evision Voltage 3 phase 208 240Vac 3 phase 480Vac Enclosure Type Open chassis IEC 1 00 NEMA 1 IEC IP20 Fig 1 3 SPEC Number Structure Open Chassis Type IEC 00 Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the Drive is mounted in a control panel also called protected chassis TERMS NEMA Type 1 IEC IP20 The Drive is shielded from the exterior and can thus be mounted to the interior wall of a building not necessarily enclosed in a control panel The protective structure conforms to the standards of NEMA 1 in the USA All protective covers Fig 1 4 and Fig 1 6 must be installed to conform with IEC IP20 and NEMA Type 1 requirements Physical Installation 1 4 Models CIMR F7U20P4 thru 2018 40P4 thru 4018 The external appearance component names and terminal arrangement of the Drive are shown in Fig 1 4 and 1 5 Top protective cover Required for NEMA Type 1 IEC IP20 Front cover Digital Operator Terminal cover Nameplate Bottom protective cover Fig 1 4 Drive Appearance us fc fe i Control circuit terminals D hl Main circuit terminals Charge indicator Ground
178. f50HP 2 4 CDBR 2110B 420onm 500 162 _ 49 4 50 2 4 CDBR 2110B 320ohm 640 169 01 75 ___ 49 1 of 75HP __ 21108 320 0 640AT 7 1895 00 55 0 of 100HP Braking __4of CDBR 2110B 420ohm 500A 053 25 46 8 OF 125HP Power 4of CDBR 2110B 320ohm 640A terzeoft50HP 48 6 150 tof CDBR 2022B 9 00 092A 154 OF ASHP 7 3 Of 15HP_ Duty 1of CDBR 2022B 680ohm 116A 52 20 _ 6 6 Of 2OHP_ 15096 2 of CDBR 2022B LE I 25HP 8 796 of 25HP Peak 20f CDBR 2022B 9 00 09 2 152 of 30HP 1 7 2 of 30HP Braking 2 4 CDBR 2022B 6 80 116A j t5t9eof40HP 6 5 OF AOHP_ Power 1 of CDBR 2110B ce 50HP 7 7 of 50HP Tof CDBR 2110B 2 10 ohm 36 c o 60 __ 6 4 of 60HP 6 Average Braking 1 of CDBR 21108 1 60 ohm 46 0A 201 CDBR 2022B 6 80 ohm 11 6 148 of 125HP 5 8 of 125HP Power 2of CDBR 2110B 1 60 460A tez9ot15oHP 6 396 of 150HP Fig 2 5 230V Rated Braking Transistor and Resistor Units Electrical Installation 2 13 Duty and Required Dynamic Braking Units and Resistors Typical Performance Braking Motor Required Dynamic Resistance and rms Additional Required Resistance and rms Peak Braking Average Braking Duty Power Br
179. formance Braking Motor Voltage and Required Dynamic Resistance and rms Additional Required Resistance and rms Peak Braking Average Braking Dut Power Rating Braking Units Current Rating Dynamic Braking Units Current Rating Power Power Standard lof CDBR 2022B 9 000hm 120A 54 0115 _ 12 5 of 15HP Duty 1of CDBR 2022B 6 80 160A 152 OF QOHP 12 5 2 150 2of CDBR 2022B 9 00 120A 2 0 25 __ 14 8 ot 25HP 2 4 CDBR 2022B 9 00 12044 152 0 0 123 0 30 Braking ___2of CDBR 2022B 6 80 160A 151 OFAOHP 124 Power 1 4 CDBR 2110B 2 10 50 0A 194 01504 _ 14 8 OF SOHP_ 1 62 OF BOHP__ 12 3 6 12 1 of CDBR 2110B 1699 0 75 Tof CDBR 2110B 160 ohm 64 0 1 of CDBR 2022B 680 ohm 16 0 156 of 100 __ 11 6 of 100HP 2 of CDBR 2110B 1 60 ohm 64 0 167 of 150 __ 12 1 of 150HP Heavy 2 4 CDBR 2022B 18 0 1204 2 154 OP ASHP 49 8 OF 15HP_ Duty 2of CDBR 2022B 13 6 16 0 20HP 49 996 of 20HP 15096 1 of CDBR 2110B 4 200hm 50 0 197 of 25HP 60 0 of 25HP Peak 1 4 CDBR 2110B 420ohm 500 163 0130 _ 49 9 Braking 1of CDBR 2110B 320onm 640 160 0140 _ 465 140 Power _201 CDBR 2110B 4 20 500A 194 0 5 59 4960
180. g Er 09 Accelerate Motor Speed Fault Detected only for rotational auto tuning Er 11 Motor Speed Er 12 I det Circuit Current Detection Fault Probable Cause is an error in the data input for autotuning is an error in the relationship between the motor output and the motor rated current There is an error between the no load current setting and the input motor rated current when auto tun ing for only line to line resistance is performed for vector control An alarm is detected during auto tun ing The STOP key is pressed during auto tuning and the auto tuning is interrupted Auto tuning is not completed within the specified time The auto tuning result is outside the parameter setting range The motor did not accelerate in the specified time C1 01 10 seconds The torque reference exceeded 10096 during acceleration Detected when 1 02 2 or 3 vector control Current exceeded the motor rated current DCCT feedback polarity is incor rect Any of U TI V T2 and W T3 has open phase Corrective Action Check input data Check Drive and motor capacity Check motor rated current and no load current Check input data Check wirings and around the machine Check the load Check input data Check motor wiring If the motor and the machine connected disconnect the motor from the machine For Er 08 if the set
181. g and test Drive Cycle power to the Drive ircui Contacts on the soft charge Check the condition of the soft Sott Charge Circuit Fault contactor were dirty and the The pre charge contactor opened while soft charge contactor does not charge contactor Drive was running function mechanically Repair or replace the Power PCB Gate Drive PCB Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 8 Alarm Detection Alarms are Drive protection functions that do not operate the fault contact The Drive will automatically return to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed During an alarm condition the Digital Operator display flashes and an alarm output is generated at the multi function outputs H2 01 to H2 03 if programmed When an alarm occurs take appropriate corrective action according to the table below Table 6 2 Alarm Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display BUS Option Com Err Flashing CALL SI F G ComCall Flashing CE MEMOBUS Com Err Flashing DEV Speed Deviation Flashing DNE Drive not Enable Flashing EF External Fault EFO Opt External Flt Flashing Description Option Communication Error After initial communication is established the connection was lost Serial communication transmission error Communication has not yet been established Modbus Communications Error Enabled when 5 05 1 and 5 04 3 Excessive Speed Deviation Det
182. g supplied received for a time longer than the setting in to the PG Supply power tothe Po propery 1 14 Check for open circuit when using brake motor Remove power from the Drive DC Bus Fuse Disconnect the motor Detects if the DC bus fuse has opened Warning Shorted output transistor s or Perform the checks without power DC Bus Fuse Open Never run the drive after replacing the terminals in Table 6 6 DC bus fuse without checking for shorted components Replace the shorted component s Replace the defective fuse Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 7 Digital Operator Display RH DynBrk Resistor RR DynBrk Transistr SVE Zero Servo Fault UL3 Undertorq Det 1 UL4 Undertorq Det 2 UV1 DC Bus Undervolt UV2 CTL PS Undervolt UV3 MC Answerback Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing continued Description Cause Corrective Action Dynamic Braking Resistor Verify dynamic braking duty e andes resis Overhauling load extended cycle or is activated when L8 01 1 d ic brakine dut le This fault is only applicable when using the de ene ting Monitor DC bus voltage 396 duty cycle resistor which is mounted on resistor 5 the Drive s heatsink For all other resistors Replace dynamic braking set L8 01 0 resistor Cycle power to the Drive Dynamic Braking Transistor High DC bus voltage Replace defective dynamic iu uds dynamic braking transistor m CHAM iu dy
183. h the Programming Menu Basic Programming 5 14 Tables 5 3 to 5 5 list the factory settings of V F patterns when V F without PG or V F with PG control method is selected A1 02 2 O or 1 Table 5 3 V F Pattern for Drive Capacities F7U20P4 21P5 for 208 240V Class E1 03 Pattern Selection Max Output Frequency Hz Max Output Voltage Base Frequency Mid Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage Min Output Frequency Min Output Voltage 1 For 480V class units the voltage values are twice that of 230V class units 2 These default values are for V F or V F with PG control methods A1 02 0 or 1 Table 5 3 V F Pattern for Drive Capacity F7U20P4 21P5 for 208 240V Class continued Parameter No E1 03 Pattern Selection 8 9 A B D E amp FF Max Output Frequency Hz 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 90 0 60 0 Name Unit Factory Setting Max Output Voltage 230 0 230 0 230 0 230 0 230 0 230 0 Base Frequency 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 Mid Output Frequency 2 5 2 9 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 Mid Output Voltage 21 8 21 8 Min Output Frequency 1 3 1 5 Min Output Voltage 1 For 480V class units the voltage values are twice that of 230V class units 2 These default values are for V F or V F with PG control methods A1 02 0 or 1 Basic Programming 5 15 Table 5 4 V F Pattern for Drive Capacity F7U22P2
184. hat the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above faces into the Drive 2 Connect the power connector securely and place the power connector and cable into the fan cover 3 Mount the fan cover on the Drive Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Drive Maintenance 7 5 Models CIMR F7U2022 thru 2110 4030 thru 4300 These Drives have an internal cooling fan assembly and a heatsink cooling fan assembly heatsink cooling fan assembly is attached to the top of the heatsink inside the Drive The cooling fan s can be replaced without removing the Drive from the installation panel Removing the Heatsink Cooling Fan Assembly 1 Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan assembly 2 Remove the terminal cover Drive cover Digital Operator and front cover from the front of the Drive 3 Remove the Control PCB bracket if necessary to which the cards are mounted Remove all cables connected to the Control PCB and remove the cooling fan power connector from the fan board 13 PCB positioned near the top of the Drive 4 Remove the cooling fan power connectors from the gate drive board 3PCB positioned at the back of the Drive 5 Remove the fan assembly screws and pull out the fan assembly from the Drive 6 Remove the cooling fan s from the fan assembly Mounting the Heatsink Cooling Fan Assembly After attaching a new cooling fan reve
185. he STOP key on has been pressed Digital Operator 3 5 Drive Main Menus The Drive s parameters and monitoring functions are organized into groups called menus that make it easier to read and set parameters The Drive is equipped with five menus The five menus and their primary functions are shown in Table 3 7 Table 3 7 Drive Main Menus Main Menu Primary Functions Operation DRIVE Quick Setting QUICK Programming ADV Modified Constants VERIFY Auto Tuning A TUNE The Drive can be run in this menu Use this menu for monitoring values such as frequency reference or output current displaying fault his tory or displaying the fault traces The Drive can be programmed in this menu Use this menu to set read the most commonly used parameters The Drive can be programmed in this menu Use this menu to set read every parameter The Drive can be programmed in this menu Use this menu to set read the parameters that have been modified from their factory default settings The Drive can be programmed in this menu Use this menu to auto tune the Drive in order to optimize motor control The motor parameters are calculated and set automatically after successfully completing Auto Tuning Digital Operator 3 6 Menu Structure The menu selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed from a monitor or setting display While viewing the menu selection display press the
186. he fan motor is burned open If the fan is not working then disconnect the fan and apply 24Vdc to the fan to test the motor The Heat Sink Cooling Fans cool the heat sink to remove heat from the Drive Conduct a visual inspection to ensure the fan turns freely If there is no physical evidence that the fan is bad the motor can be checked with a digital 230 240Vac Cooling Fans multi meter Heat Sink Seta digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Measure across the fan motor terminals If the fan motor is good the measured value should be about 500 ohms If zero ohms are measured conclude that the fan motor is shorted If infinite ohms are measured conclude that the fan motor is burned open If the fan is not working then disconnect the fan and apply 230 240Vac to the fan to test the motor Large Drive units contain a Cooling Fan Fuse It is located on either the Gate Drive Board 3PCB or the Tap Change Board 8PCB If the Cooling Fan Fuse is open then the 230 240Vac cooling fans may be defective Cooling Fan Fuse Seta digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Place one lead of the multi meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi meter on the other side of the fuse If the fuse is good the measured value will be zero ohms If the fuse is bad the measured value will be infinite ohms Drive Date Stamp Information This information is used to determine when a Drive was built to see if it is within its warranty
187. he heatsink cooling fan operation 0 Fan On Run Mode Fan will operate only when the Drive is running and for L8 11 seconds after RUN is removed 1 Fan Always On Cooling fan operates whenever the Drive is powered up This parameter sets the delay time for the cooling fan turn off after the run command is removed when L8 10 0 010300 2 When the Drive is installed in an ambient temperature exceeding its rating the Drive overload OL2 protection level is adjusted the Drive is running Parameters 35 Parameter No L8 15 L8 18 Parameter Name Digital Operator Display OL2 Characteristic Selection at Low Speeds OL2 Sel L Spd Soft CLA Selection Soft CLA Sel Table A1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Open Loop Vector Setting Range Factory Description Setting Flux Vector This parameter assists in protecting the output transistors from overheating when output current is high and output frequency is low 6Hz and less 0 Disabled 1 Enabled L8 18 is active Enables and disables the software current limit function Consult the factory before disabling 0 Disabled 1 Enabled a Hunting Prevention Hunting Prevention Selection Hunt Prev Select Hunting Prevention Gain Set ting Hunt Prev Gain Speed Feedback Detection Control AFR Gain Gain Speed Feedback Detection Control AFR Time Con stant AFR Time Speed Feedback Detection Control A
188. he speed decrease as a percentage of motor base speed 1 001 06 when the motor is at 100 load torque Setting of 0 0 disables RA 0 096 A Droop Value 100 0 droop control d 02 Droop Control Delay Time Determines the droop control delay time in response to a load 0 03 to 0 05sec A Droop Delay Time change 2 00 SaaS ATT Energy Saving Energy Saving Control Energy Savings function enable disable selection Selection 0 Disabled Otol 0 A A A A Energy Save Sel 1 Enabled Energy Saving Gain Jt 0 0 to b8 02 Energy Save Gain Sets energy savings control gain when in vector control method 10 0 0 7 A A Energy Saving Control Filter Sets energy saving control filter time constant when in vector 0 00 to KVA Time Constant trol method 10 00 Depen A A Energy Saving F T 4 dent Energy Saving Coefficient kVA 0 0 to Value 655 00 Depen A A Energy Save COEF dent Power Detection Filter Time Used to fine tune the energy savings function when in v f control 0 to i b8 05 kw Filter Time method 2000 oe de Lud Search Operation Voltage Limit 0 to 100 096 A A Search V Limit premere Zero Servo Sets the position loop gain for Zero Servo command Zero Servo Gain t EMO D RN 522275 d This function is effective when multi function input zero to 100 2 A 0 Servo Gain MT servo command is set Zero Servo Completion Width Sets number of pulses used for the multi function output of Zero Servo Co
189. hen reference drops 90 or more of its current value in less than 400ms 0 Normal Operation Drive will run at the frequency reference 1 Run at L4 06 PrevRef Drive will run at the percentage set in 14 06 of the frequency reference level at the time frequency reference was lost If the frequency reference loss function is enabled L4 05 1 and frequency reference is lost the Drive will run at a reduced frequency reference determined by the following formula Fref Fref at time of loss L4 06 Fault Restart Sets the counter for the number of times the drive will perform an automatic restart on the following faults GF LF OC OV PF PUF RH RR OLI OL2 OL3 OLA UV1 Auto restart will check to see if the fault has cleared every 5ms When no fault is present the Drive will attempt an auto restart If the Drive faults after an auto restart attempt the counter is incremented When the Drive oper ates without fault for 10 minutes the counter will reset to the value set in L5 01 Determines if the fault contact activates during an automatic restart attempt 0 No Fault Relay fault contact will not activate during an automatic restart attempt 1 Fault Relay Active fault contact will activate during an automatic restart attempt Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 33 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Open Loop Vector Setting Facto
190. hod with PG feedback Verify the control mode in A1 02 Control Method Selection Error was selected A1 02 1 or 3 but a and or the installation of the PG PG option board was not installed option board 06 PG Opt Missing The same function has been selected for the analog input selection and the pulse input selection OPE07 Multifunction Analos IBS H3 09 B and H6 01 1 Check parameters b1 01 H3 09 and Analog Selection Bror H3 09 C and H6 01 2 H6 01 and correct the errors b1 01 Reference Selection was set to 4 pulse input and H6 01 Pulse Train Input was set to a value other than 0 frequency reference A setting has been made that was not applicable in the current control 08 Function Selection E method Verify the control method and the Constant Selection A function used only function in question loop vector control was selected while in V F control Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 13 Digital Operator Display 09 PID Selection OPE10 V f Ptrn Setting OPE11 CarrFrq On Delay ERR EEPROM R W Err Table 6 3 OPE Error Displays continued Description PID Control Setup Error V f Parameter Setting Error Carrier Frequency Parameter Set ting Error Carrier frequency proportional gain C6 05 gt 6 and C6 04 gt 6 03 Upper lower limit error of C6 03 to 6 05 and N9 11 C6 01 0 and C6 02
191. hout causing the DC Bus voltage to exceed the stall prevention level The fastest time possible is 1 10 the active deceleration time If L3 01 3 the stall prevention with braking resistor function is enabled The DC bus voltage level is controlled during fast deceleration and allows for a faster than normal deceleration time Use this setting with a braking resistor when overvoltage fault OV sometimes occurs even under settings 1 or 2 IMPORTANT In Flux Vector Control Mode A1 02 3 setting stall prevention with DB resistor L3 04 3 cannot be done Basic Programming 5 22 Notes Basic Programming 5 23 Basic Programming 5 24 Chapter 6 Diagnostics amp Troubleshooting This chapter describes diagnostics and troubleshooting for the Drive Fault Detection Ur 6 2 Alarm 6 9 Operator Programming 6 13 Auto T hing aule eut te e toot te tete tee ts 6 15 Digital Operator Copy Function 6 17 Troubleshooting eee 6 18 Main Circuit Test 6 26 Drive Date Stamp 6 29 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 1 Fault Detection When the Drive detects a fault the fault information is displayed on the digital operator the fault contact closes and the motor coasts to stop However a fault with selec
192. ias 00 Motor rated voltage E1 05 Voltage boost after V F pattern 5 Accel Decel Time Coefficient 00 Active accel decel time C1 01 thru C1 08 6 DC Injection Braking Current 00 Drive rated current Parameter b2 02 is disabled 7 Overtorque Undertorque Detection Level Used for multi function digital output for overtorque undertorque 100 motor rated torque OLV FV or drive rated current V F w PG Internal overtorque detection level C6 02 disabled 8 Stall Prevention Level During Run Terminal A3 Function Selec 00 L3 06 tion 9 Frequency Reference Lower Limit Oto IF Terminal A3 Sel 00 Maximum output frequency 1 04 Either d2 02 setting or A3 input level whichever is greater becomes effective A Jump Frequency 4 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 B PID Feedback 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 C PID Set Point 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 Frequency reference no longer acts as a PID setpoint D Frequency Reference Bias 2 FBIAS2 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 Total bias Internal bias H3 03 FBIAS H3 07 A3 input evel E Motor Temperature See parameters L1 03 amp L1 04 10 FWD Torque Limit Quadrant 1 00 Motor rated torque 11 REV Torque Limit Quadrant 3 00 Motor rated torque 12 Regenerative Torque Limit Quadrants 2 and 4 00 Motor rated torque 13 Torque Reference in Torque Control Torque Limit in Speed Control Quadrant
193. ican installations 1 American spec 2 European spec Sets the initial value of the heatsink fan operation time monitor 01 40 Clears the fault memory contained in U2 and U3 monitors 0 Disabled no effect 1 Enabled resets U2 and U3 monitors and returns 02 12 to zero Used to reset the kilowatt hour monitor U1 29 to zero 0 Disabled no change 1 Enabled Resets U1 29 to zero and returns 02 14 to zero Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 38 Setting Range Factory Setting m Control Method Loop Vector Flux Vector Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Po Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting nis Vector COPY Function This parameter controls the copying of parameters to and from the digital operator 0 COPY SELECT no function 1 INV gt OP READ parameters are copied from the Drive to the digital operator Copy Function Selection 2 OP gt INV WRITE parameters are copied from the digital 03 01 3 0to3 Copy Function Sel operator to the Drive 3 OP lt gt INV VERIFY Parameter settings in the Drive are com pared to those in the digital operator NOTE When using the copy function the Drive model number 02 04 software number U1 14 and control method A1 02 must match or an error will occur Enables and disables the digital ope
194. ime via user initialization when enabled Optional Drive Wizard software allows upload download as well as graphing and monitoring of drive parameters from a PC for ease of drive management This manual may describe trademarked equipment which is the property of other companies who are the registered owners Other Documents and Manuals are available to support special use or installation of this product These documents may be provided with the product or upon request Contact Yaskawa Electric America Inc as required Documents may include the following TM F7 02 Programming Manual included on CD ROM with product TM F7 11 Manual included on CD ROM with product DriveWizard Software and Manual Included on CD ROM with product Option Instructions Included on CD ROM with product This manual is subject to change as product improvements occur The latest version of the manual can be obtained from the Yaskawa website www drives com The date shown on the rear cover is changed when revisions are made The latest version of Drive software is also shown The Drive s capacity is categorized based on two types of load characteristics Heavy Duty and Normal Duty See Table 1 1 below for the differences between Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Table i 1 Drive Duty Selection Parameter Rated Output Overload Carrier Maximum Output C6 01 Current Capacity Frequency Frequency Low 0 Heavy Duty Standard rating default varie
195. imensions 0 1 1 7 Checking and Controlling Installation 1 11 Installation Orientation and Clearance 1 12 Removing and Attaching Terminal 1 13 Removing Attaching Digital Operator and Front 1 14 Chapter 2 Electrical 2 1 Terminal Block Configuration s dod uo desert taedio 2 2 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals coiere ote tent la rta eu te 2 3 VPE Me te ee Ee o o egest 2 21 EMG Compatibility etr 2 30 Installing and Wiring Option BOSIad s EIER 2 34 Chapter 3 3 1 Digital Operator Display pui terrenae te tod e res eee TR 3 2 Digital Operator IKGyS ed ade OO 3 3 Drive Mode UNC ALOIS uu i a RD 3 4 Drive Main Mrs t I va et mem m T EIAS 3 6 Quick Sein MeL ss ere Ipae ahi ica Tuo bau 3 11 Programming MGM ec 3 12 Example of Changing a essen 3 15 Table of Contents vii Ghapter Start Up
196. ing starts when ramp 0 0 to b2 01 Frequency to stop b1 03 0 is selected If b2 01 E1 09 DC Injection brak DCInj Start Freq ing starts at E1 09 DC Injection Braking Current Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Drive b2 02 0 to 100 DCInj Current rated current b2 03 Braking Time at Sets the time of DC injection braking at start in units of 0 01 0 00 to DCInj Time Start seconds 10 00 Sets the time length of DC injection braking at stop in units of 0 01 seconds 1 When b1 03 2 actual DC Injection time is calculated as fol DC Injection Braking Time at lows b2 04 10 Output Frequency 1 04 Stop 2 When b1 03 0 this parameter determines the amount of time DCInj Time Stop DC Injection is applied to the motor at the end of the decel ramp 3 This should be set to a minimum of 0 50 seconds when using HSB This will activate DC injection during the final portion of HSB and help ensure that the motor stops completely 213 Sets the scan rate of terminals 51 to 58 Digital Input Scan Time pu b1 06 0 2mS 2 scans for quick response Cntl Input Scans 3 518 2 scans for noisy environments 0 5Hz 50 0 00sec oc o 0 00 to 10 00 0 00sec Magnetic Flux Compensation Capacity Field Comp Sets the magnetic flux compensation as a percentage of the no load current value E2 03 0 to1000 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is
197. is obtained THIS COMPLETES THE DRIVE START UP PROCEDURE StartUp 4 16 Notes StatUp 4 17 StartUp 4 18 Chapter 5 Basic Programming This chapter describes basic programming for the Drive Basic Programming 5 2 Control Methodes iea enni xe bei ha ota 5 2 Speed Command Source 5 3 Run Command Source 5 4 Stopping 5 5 Accel Decel 5 8 Carrier Frequency 5 9 Preset 5 10 Input 6 Ehe metet 5 11 V F Pattern tt ba eM 5 11 Motor 5 19 PG ODOM eck 5 19 Analog Output 5 20 Motor Dverload Falls eu I ER PEDE 5 21 Stall Prevent OMe ee 5 22 Basic Programming 5 1 F7 Basic Programming Parameters Description of Parameter Tables This chapter details all of the parameters in the Quick Setting Menu QUICK Some parameters are not available for all Control Methods See Appendix A for details Setting range and factory default value of the parameter follows the control method table for each parameter Control Method B A1 02 Control Method Selection 0 V F Control factory default V F with PG Feedbac
198. is possible to use analog inputs in place of Frequency Reference 1 and Frequency Reference 2 Ifb1 01 1 then the analog input A1 will be used instead of Frequency Reference 1 for the first preset speed If b1 01 0 then Frequency Reference 1 d1 01 will be used f H3 09 2 then the analog input A2 will be used instead of Frequency Reference 2 41 02 for the second preset speed If H3 09z2 then Frequency Reference 2 will be used IMPORTANT The programming of d1 01 through d1 17 will be in the units specified by the display scaling parameter 01 03 Basic Programming 5 10 Input Voltage Setting 1 01 Input Voltage Setting Setting Range 155 0 to 255 0V 240V Models 310 0V to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 240 0V 240V Models 480 0V 480V Models Set the Input Voltage parameter E1 01 to the nominal voltage of the connected AC power supply This parameter adjusts the levels of some protective features of the Drive i e Overvoltage Built in Braking Transistor Turn on Stall Prevention etc 1 01 also serves as the Maximum Base Voltage used by the Preset V Hz curves 1 03 0 to E V F Pattern B 1 03 V F Pattern Selection s fons SoS OH Note VT Variable Torque HST High Starting Torque This parameter is only available in the V F or V F with PG control methods A1 02 0 or 1 The Drive operates utilizing a set V f pattern to de
199. it DC voltage is below 380 Vdc Momentary power loss ride thru Two selectable methods 1 Time base for up to 2 seconds 2 Until control power is active Heatsink over temperature Protection by thermistor Stall prevention Stall prevention during acceleration deceleration and running Ground fault protection Protection by electronic circuit 50 of inverter rated current DC bus charge Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approximnately 50 Vdc or more Enclosure Type Enclosed wall mounted type NEMA 1 CIMR F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018 Open chassis type 00 CIMR F7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300 Ambient operating temperature 14 F to 104 F 10 C to 40 NEMA 1 type 14 113 10 C to 45 C Open chassis type Vibration 10 to 20 Hz 32 ft sec 9 8 m s max 20 to 50 Hz 6 5 ft sec 2 m s max Environment Specifications C 5 Notes Specifications C 6 Appendix D Communications This appendix details the specifications connections and programming of the Drive for Modbus communication Using Modbus D 2 Modbus Function Code Details D 8 Modbus Data D 10 Modbus Self Diagnosis sees D 18 Communications D 1 Using Modbus Communi
200. itive red meter lead on terminal U T1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal V T2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal W T3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal U TI Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal V T2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed 01 012 Place the positive red meter lead terminal W T3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal U T1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal V T2 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal W T3 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Output Transistors Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal U T1 Expected reading is
201. ive output frequency is greater than or equal to the value in L4 01 with hysteresis determined by L4 02 6 Inverter Ready Closed When the drive is powered up not in a fault state and in the DRIVE mode 7 DC Bus Undervoltage Closed When the DC bus voltage falls below the UV trip level set in L2 05 8 Base Block 1 N O Closed When the drive is not outputting voltage 9 Operator Reference Closed When the frequency reference is coming from the digital operator A LOCAL REMOTE Operation Closed When the run command is coming from the digital operator Torque Detection 1 Closed When the output current torque exceeds the torque value set in parameter L6 02 for more time than is set in parameter L6 03 C Loss of Reference Closed When the drive has detected a loss of the analog frequency reference Frequency reference is considered lost when it drops 90 in 0 4 seconds Parameter L4 05 determines drive reaction to a loss of frequency reference D Braking Resistor Fault Closed When braking resistor or transistor is overheating or has faulted Only active when L8 01 1 E Fault Closed When the drive experiences a major fault F Not Used 10 Alarm Closed When drive experiences an alarm Terminal M1 M2 Function Selection Term 1 2 Sel Continued on following page Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 24 Table 1 F7 Param
202. k Open Loop Vector The setting of parameter 1 02 determines which control method the Drive will use for operation Select the contro method best suited for the application V F Control is for general purpose and multiple motor applications V F with PG Feedback is for general purpose applications requiring closed loop speed control Open Loop Vector is for applications requiring precise speed control quick response and higher torque at low speeds 150 torque below 1Hz Flux Vector Control is for applications requiring very precise speed and torque control at a wide speed range including zero speed It requires encoder feedback Basic Programming 5 2 Speed Command Source B b1 01 Reference Source Selection Operator Monitor U1 01 or parameter d1 01 Terminals Analog input terminal 1 or terminal A2 see parameter H3 13 factory default 2 Modbus Serial Communication RS 422 485 terminals R R S and S Option Board Option board connected on 2CN Pulse Train Input Terminal RP and AC In order to run the Drive and motor in REMOTE mode the Drive must receive a run command and a speed command from an external source Parameter b1 01 specifies from where the speed command will be accepted To switch into the REMOTE mode press the LOCAL REMOTE button on the digital operator while the Drive is stopped IMPORTANT If the set speed command is less than the minimum output frequency E1 09 with a run co
203. l Prevention Selection During Deceleration StallP Decel Sel Stall Prevention Selection During Running StallP Run Sel Stall Prevention Level During Running StallP Run Level Table A1 F7 Parameter List Continued Description Stall Prevention Selects the stall prevention method used to prevent excessive current during acceleration 0 Disabled Motor accelerates at active acceleration The motor may stall if load is too heavy or accel time is too short 1 General Purpose When output current exceeds L3 02 level acceleration stops Acceleration will continue when the output current level falls below the L3 02 level Intelligent The active acceleration rate is ignored Acceleration is completed in the shortest amount of time without exceeding the current value set in L3 02 This function is enabled when L3 01 is 1 or 2 Drive rated current is 100 Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current occurs at factory setting Sets the lower limit for stall prevention during acceleration as a percentage of the Drive s rated current when operation is in the frequency range above E1 06 constant power region When using a braking resistor use setting 0 Setting 3 is used in specific applications 0 Disabled The drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate If the load is too large or the deceleration time is too short an OV fault may occur General Purpose The drive decel
204. ltage to verify the contacts change states On Drives without a board mounted contactor verify that the 24Vdc auxiliary coil measures about 2 2M ohms The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states The DC bus fuse is located in the negative portion of the DC Bus The DC bus fuse is used to protect the main circuit components if the output transistors short If the DC bus fuse is open at least one of the output transistors has failed When a transistor fails there is a short between the positive and negative portions of the DC Bus The DC bus fuse does not protect the DC Bus Fuse transistors but protects the rest of the main circuit from the high current present during a short Fl Never replace the DC bus fuse without first checking all of the output transistors Set a digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Place one lead of the multi meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi meter on the other side of the fuse If the fuse is good the measured value will be zero ohms If the fuse is bad the measured value will be infinite ohms Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 27 Table 6 6 Main Circuit Test Procedure continued The output transistors are used to switch the DC bus voltage to allow current to flow to the motor The following checks will read erroneously if the DC bus fuse is open 1 Set a digital multi meter to the Diode Check setting 2 Place the pos
205. make sure that the three phase power is disconnected and locked out With power removed from the unit the DC bus capacitors will stay charged for several minutes The Charge LED in the Drive will glow red until the DC bus voltage is below 10Vdc To ensure that the DC bus is completely discharged measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltmeter set to the highest scale Be sure not to touch terminals immediately after the power has been turned off Doing so can result in electric shock Please refer to Warnings starting on page i Table 7 1 Periodic Inspections With no Power Applied Corrective Action External terminals Are all screws and bolts tight Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly mounting bolts connectors etc Are connectors tight Reconnect the loose connectors Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using TET 2 Cooling fins Ate Des ne OE or dusty clean and dry air at a pressure between 55 85 psi Control PCB Terminal PCB Is there any conductive dirt or oil Power PCB mist on the PCBs Gate Drive PCBs Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using clean and dry air at a pressure between 55 85 psi Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using clean and dry air at a pressure between 55 85 psi Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean Input Diodes IPMs Output Transistors Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
206. minals S S R and R The terminating resistor must be turned ON only if the Drive is at the very end of the serial communication chain Set the terminating resistor by turning ON pin of switch S1 5 x 5 lt 1 RS 422A Terminating 9 ON resi F 2 Switch 51 located LS terminal board Terminating resistor 172W 110 Ohms Fig D 2 Communication Connection Terminals and Terminating Resistor 1 Separate the communication cables from the main circuit cables and control circuit wiring IMPORTANT 2 Use shielded cables for the communication cable and use proper shield clamps Shield at one end only 3 When using RS 485 communication connect S to and S to R on the control circuit terminal board See Fig D 3 below Fig D 3 RS 485 Communication Connection Procedure for Setting Up Communication Use the following procedure to perform communication with the PLC 1 Turn OFF the input to the Drive power and connect the communication cable between the PLC or other master device and the Drive 2 Turn ON the input power to the Drive 3 Set the required communication parameters H5 01 to H5 07 using the Digital Operator 4 Turn OFF the input to the Drive power and check that the Digital Operator display has completely extinguished 5 Turn ON the input power to the Drive once again 6 Perform communication with the master device Communicatio
207. mmand input the RUN indicator on the digital operator will turn on and the STOP indicator on the digital operator will blink To have the Drive follow the speed command set by the digital operator Set b1 01 0 The speed command can then be entered into the U1 01 monitor or in parameter 41 01 To have the Drive follow an analog speed command Set b1 01 1 and connect a 0 to 10 Vdc or 10 to 10 Vdc signal to terminals A1 and Be sure to set parameter H3 01 to the proper setting Or connect a 4 20 mA signal to terminals A2 and AC Make sure the SI 2 switch and corresponding parameter H3 08 is properly set up when using terminal A2 To have the Drive receive the speed command from Modbus serial communication Set b1 01 2 and connect the RS 485 422 serial communications cable to terminals R S and S on the removable terminal block Make sure the 51 1 switch and the Modbus H5 parameters are properly set To use an option board to input the speed command Set b1 01 3 and install a communications option board into the 2CN port on the Drive control board Consult the manual supplied with the option board for instructions on integrating the Drive and communications option board If b1 01 3 but an option board is not installed in 2CN an OPEO5 Fault will be displayed on the digital operator and the Drive will not run IMPORTANT To use pulse train to input a speed command Set b1 01 4 and connect the pulse train cable to termin
208. mp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop Motor Overheat Fault Opera tion Selection Motor OH Fault Selection Motor Temperature Input Filter Time Motor Temperature Filter This parameter adjusts the filter on the motor temperature analog input H3 09 E Increase to add stability decrease to improve response Power Loss Ridethru Enables and disables the momentary power loss function 0 Disabled Drive trips on UV1 fault when power is lost 1 Power Loss Ride Thru Time Drive will restart if power returns within the time set in L2 02 2 CPU Power Active Drive will restart if power returns prior to control power supply shut down In order for a restart to occur the run command must be maintained throughout the ride thru period Momentary Power Loss Detection Selection PwrL Selection Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Time PwrL Ridethru t Sets the power loss ride thru time This value is dependent on the capacity of the drive Only effective when L2 01 1 Sets the minimum time to wait to allow the residual motor voltage to decay before the drive output turns back on during power loss ridethru After a power loss if L2 03 is greater than L2 02 operation resumes after the time set in L2 03 Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time PwrL Baseblock t Momentary Power Loss Volt age Recovery Ramp Time PwrL V F Ramp t Sets the time it takes the output voltage to return to the preset V f pattern after s
209. mpensation Input Phase Loss Detection Level E2 10 Tcomp ron Loss L8 06 Ph Loss I n Lvl Motor Rated Output Motor Acceleration Time 2 Motor Rated KW 5 02 MotorAccel Time Motor 2 Rated Current Drive kVA Selection E4 01 02 04 Motor Rated FLA Inverter Model Capacity Related Parameters B 3 Table Parameter Defaults 208 240V 208 240V Model Number F7U parua 20P4 20P7 21 5 22P2 23P7 25 5 27 5 2011 2015 b8 03 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 b8 04 28820 223 70 16940 15680 12290 94 75 72 69 70 44 63 13 C6 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C6 02 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 01 4 01 1 90 3 30 6 20 8 50 14 00 19 60 26 60 30 7 53 0 2 02 4 02 2 90 2 50 2 60 2 90 2 73 1 50 1 30 1 70 1 60 2 03 4 03 1 20 1 80 2 80 3 00 4 50 5 10 8 00 112 15 2 2 05 4 05 9 842 5 156 1 997 1 601 0 771 0 399 0 288 0 230 0 138 2 06 4 06 182 13 8 18 5 18 4 19 6 182 15 5 19 5 172 E2 10 14 26 53 77 112 172 262 245 272 E2 11 E4 07 0 4 0 75 1 5 22 37 5 5 7 5 15 12 02 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 2 0 12 03 0 1 02 0 3 04 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 L2 04 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 6 18 02 95 95 95 100 95 95 95 95 90 18 06 5 7 5 10 12 12 10 17 21 17 5 02 0 178 0 142 0 166 0 145 0 154 0 168 0 175 0 265 0 244 02 04 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Table
210. mpletion zero servo completion Width Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters 8 Ug lt Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory 4 4 Description Digital Operator Display Range Setting Vit Loop Vector a Accel 1 01 Acceleration Time 1 accelerate f f n Accel Time 1 ets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency 10 0sec Table A1 F7 Parameter List Continued 02 Timer Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero Decel Time 1 duesey C1 03 Acceleration Time 2 Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when Accel Time 2 selected via a multi function input C1 04 Deceleration Time 2 Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when 0 0 Decel Time 2 selected via a multi function input to Acceleration Time 3 Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when 6000 0 1 05 Ne Accel Time 3 selected via a multi function input Deceleration Time 3 Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when C1 06 Decel Time 3 selected via a multi function input Acceleration Time 4 Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when 1 07 Accel Time4 selected via a multi function input Deceleration Time 4 Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when C1 08 3
211. munications Option Board Trace Sampling Current Monitor Display Unit Selection Current Unit Sel Torque reference torque limit selection from communications option Torq Ref Lmt Sel Table A1 F7 Parameter List Continued Description Sets the digital output function number for channel l Seet parameter group for possible selections Effective when digital output card DO 02 or DO 08 is used Sets the digital output function number for channel 2 Seet parameter group for possible selections Effective when digital output card DO 02 or DO 08 is used Sets the digital output function number for channel 3 Seet parameter group for possible selections Effective when digital output card DO 02 or DO 08 is used Sets the digital output function number for channel 4 Seet parameter group for possible selections Effective when digital output card DO 02 or DO 08 is used Sets the digital output function number for channel 5 Seet parameter group for possible selections Effective when digital output card DO 02 or DO 08 is used Sets the digital output function number for channel 6 Seet parameter group for possible selections Effective when digital output card DO 02 or DO 08 is used 7 Seet Sets the digital output function number for channe parameter group for possible selections Effective when digital output card DO 02 or DO 08 is used Sets the digital output function number for channel 8 Seet parame
212. n Fig 2 20 Table 2 16 lists the type of Option Boards and their specifications Table 2 16 Option Board Specifications Option Board Specifications Mounting Location Single open collector feedback 4CN Single A B open collector encoder feedback 4CN PG Speed Control Boards Single line driver feedback 4CN Single A B Z line driver encoder feedback A 4CN Dual A B Z line driver encoder feedback A 4CN Analog input 0 to 10 V DC 20 kW 1 channel 4 to 20 mA 250 W 1 channel Input resolution 14 bit C 2CN Analog input 0 to 10 V DC 20 kW 4 to 20 mA 250 W 3 channels V or I Speed Reference Boards Input resolution 13 bit plus sign bit C QCN Isolated analog input 0 to 10 V DC 20 kW 4 to 20 mA 250 W 3 channels V or I Input resolution 13 bit plus sign bit AI 14B2 DI 08 8 bit digital input DI 16H2 16 bit digital input DeviceNet Communications SI N DeviceNet communications Board Profibus DP Communica Profibus DP communications tions Board InterBus S Communications InterBus S communications Board CANopen Communications CANopen communications Board P Analog output 8 bit 2 channels Analog Monitor Boards Analog output 11 bit plus sign bit 2 channels Isolated analog output 11 bit plus sign bit 2 channels Six photocoupler outputs and 2 relay outputs Digital Output Boards DO 02C 2 relay outputs D
213. n peed response will increase as the setting of N5 03 is increased Monitor Select 01 01 User Monitor Selection Selects which monitor will be displayed in the operation menu User Monitor Sel upon power up when 01 02 4 Selects which monitor will be displayed upon power up 1 Frequency Reference U1 01 2 Output Frequency U1 02 3 Output Current U1 03 4 User Monitor set by 01 01 Sets the units of the Frequency References d1 01 to 41 17 the Frequency Reference Monitors U1 01 U1 02 U1 05 and the Modbus communication requency reference 0 Hz 100 E1 04 2 to 39 RPM Enter the number of motorpoles Digital Operator Display 40 to 39999 User display Selection Set the number desired at maximum Display Scaling A output frequency 4 digit number Number of digits from the right of the decimal point Example 1 01 03 12000 will result in frequency reference from 0 0 to 200 0 200 0 Fmax Example 2 01 03 21234 will result in frequency reference from 0 00 to 12 34 12 34 Fmax User Monitor Selection After Power Up Power On Monitor Setting unit for frequency parameters Sets the setting units related toV F pattern frequency related parameters E1 04 06 09 11 related to V f 0 Hz characteristics 1 RPM V f Display Unit 01 05 LCD Brightness Adjustment Sets the contrast of the digital operator LCD A setting of 1 is LCD Contrast the lightest c
214. nality Clean Yearly al 4 lt lt Keypad Display Digital Operator If the Drive is used under the following conditions it may be necessary to inspect more often e High ambient temperatures humidity or altitudes above 3 300 feet e Frequent starting and stopping e Fluctuations of the AC power supply or load e Excessive vibration and or shock loading Poor environment including dust metal dust salt sulfuric acid chlorine e Poor storage conditions Maintenance 7 3 Periodic Maintenance of Parts In order to keep the Drive operating normally over a long period of time and to prevent down time due to an unexpected failure it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service life The data indicated in the following table is to be used as a general guideline only Periodic inspection standards vary depending on the Drive s installation environment conditions and usage The Drive s suggested maintenance periods are noted below Cooling fan s Table 7 4 Part Replacement Guidelines Standard Replacement Period Replacement Method 2 to 3 years 20 000 hours Replace with new part DC bus capacitors 5 years Replace with new part Determine need by inspection Soft charge contactor Determine need by inspection DC bus fuse Control power fuse 10 years Replace with new part PCB capacitors 5 years
215. namic braking transistor or resistor Monitor DC bus voltage Zero Servo Fault The torque limit was too small Increase the torque limit The motor position moved more than 10 000 revolutions during zero servo The load torque was too large Reduce the load torque Ensure the values in L6 02 and L6 Undertorque Detection 1 03 are appropriate Drive output current lt L6 02 for more than Motor was underloaded the time set in L6 03 when L6 01 7 8 to eliminate fault Ensure the values in L6 05 and L6 Undertorque Detection 2 06 are appropriate Drive output current lt L6 05 for more than Motor was underloaded the time set in L6 06 when L6 04 7 8 to eliminate fault Check the input circuit and Low input voltage at R L1 ae DC Bus Undervoltage S L2 and T L3 increase the input power to within 208 240Vac Default trip point is lt 190 4 specifications 480Vac Default trip point is lt 380Vdc Trip point is adjustable in L2 05 Ma dd Extend the time in C1 01 Detected when the DC bus voltage is lt L2 05 Voltage fluctuation of the input Check ihediteutsditase power is too large ge Cycle power to the Drive External load was Control Power Supply Undervoltage pulling down the Drive s Repair OF replace the Power PCB Undervoltage of the control circuit when power supplies or there was Gate Drive PCB running an internal short in the power gate drive board Remove all control wirin
216. ng auto tuning the measured value of motor rated current E2 01 was greater than the set value Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 16 Corrective Action Check motor wiring Check and correct the motor settings f the motor and the machine are connected disconnect the motor from the machine Check the input data Check the motor wiring f the motor and the machine are connected disconnect the motor from the machine Check the motor rated current value Digital Operator COPY Function Faults These faults can occur during the digital operator COPY function When a fault occurs the fault content is displayed on the operator A fault does not activate the fault contact output or alarm output Table 6 5 Digital Operator COPY Function Faults Digital Operator Display Probable Causes Corrective Action PRE 03 01 was set to 1 to write parameters when the Digital Operator was write protected READ IMPOSSIBLE 03 02 0 IFE READ DATA ERROR RDE DATA ERROR The data file read from the Drive was of the wrong size indicating corrupted data READ Function An attempted write of the Drive data to the digital operator s EEPROM failed The Drive type or software number was CPE ee different than the stored data in the digital ID UNMATCHED operator VAE The capacity of the Drive and the capacity INV KVA UNMATCH of the stored data are different CRE The control method of the Drive and
217. ng parameter 01 03 0003H to 0005 Not used 0006H PID Setpoint 0007H Analog output 1 terminal FM setting 11 V 726 to 11 V 726 gt 10 660 0008H Analog output 2 terminal AM setting 11 V 726 to 11 V 726 gt 10 660 Multi function contact output settings Bit 0 Digital output 1 terminal M1 M2 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 1 Digital output 2 terminal 3 4 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 2 Digital output 3 terminal 5 ON 1 OFF 0 Bits 3 to5 Not used Bit 6 Set fault contact terminal MA MC output using bit7 0N 1 OFF 0 Bit 7 Fault contact terminal 1 OFF 0 Bits 8 to F Not used 000 to 000 Not used Reference selection settings Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 Input PID setpoint 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Bits 3 to B Not used C Broadcast data terminal S5 input Enabled 1 Disabled 0 D Broadcast data terminal S6 input Enabled 1 Disabled 0 Broadcast data terminal S7 input Enabled 1 Disabled 0 F Broadcast data terminal S8 input Enabled 1 Disabled 0 Note Write 0 to all unused bits Do not write data to reserved registers Communications D 10 Monitor Data The following table shows the monitor data Monitor data can only be read Table D 5 Monitor Data continued Register No Status signal Bit 0 Run command Bit 1 At zero speed Bit 2 Reverse operation Bit 3 Fault reset signal Bit
218. ning Set to the motor mechanical loss as a percentage of motor rated els d power kW capacity E2 09 Motor Mechanical Loss Adjust in the following circumstances 0 0 0 Mechanical Loss NOSE 10 0 When torque loss is large due to motor bearing friction When the torque loss in the load is large Motor Iron Loss for Torque 0to 2 10 Compensation Set to the motor iron loss in watts W 65535 Depen Tcomp Iron Loss Ww dant Set to the motor rated power in kilowatts kW 0 00 to 2 11 Motor Rated Output This value is automatically set during auto tuni 650 00 D Motor Rated Power is value is automatically set during auto tuning 1HP 0 746kW kW Motor Iron core Saturation et to the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75 of magnetic as 0 00 to E2 08 Coefficient 2 flux 0 75 0 75 Saturation Comp 2 This value is automatically set during rotational auto tuning Denotes that parameter be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 16 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Description Setting V F Pattern 2 Motor 2 Control Method 9 M control y 1 control with El Selection 2 Open loop vector control Control Method P 3 Flux vector control Motor 2 Maximum Output E3 02 Frequency Max Frequency Output voltage V Motor 2 Maximum Output
219. nnector Specifications Continued Clamping Wire Size Recommended Terminal Torque Range AWG Wire Size AWG Screws Ib in mm mm 2 4 812 13 1 3 RVLU 811121 3 TI L31 35 2 to 43 99 4 30 T 4 0 to 5 0 22 1 U T1 V T2 W T3 Q2 7 79 2 to 87 97 4002 4 9 0 to 10 0 22 to 38 22 79 2 to 87 97 4to 1 0 38 9 0 to 10 0 22 to 60 3 30 4037 AN M6 35 2 to 43 99 8to4 Application NU 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 22 Dependent Nis 79 2 to 87 97 4to2 4 9 0 to 10 0 22 to 38 22 2 79 2 to 87 97 2 to 1 0 60 9 0 to 10 0 38 to 60 1 50 4045 35 2 to 43 99 8 to4 Application Me 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 22 Dependent 79 2 to 87 97 4to2 4 9 0 10 0 22 to 38 22 R L1 S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 79 2 to 87 97 1 to 1 0 2 0 W T3 RI L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 9 0 to 10 0 50 to 60 70 4055 D Drive Model CIMR F7U Terminal Symbol Wire Type 35 2 to 43 99 8to4 Application 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 22 Dependent 79 2 to 87 97 4to2 4 9 0 to 10 0 22 to 38 22 600Vac i 4 0 UL Approved 154 8 to 197 5 100 or equivalent 17 6 to 22 5 N A 3 0 80 T 77 4 to 95 0 Application ue s ens A Meses 154 8 to 197 5 2 17 6 to 22 5 38 N N 114 to 12 3 16 1 3 to 1 4 1 25 250 is 4 0 0 154 8 197 5 77 4 to 95 0 Application 154 8 to 197 5 1 M10 17 6 to 22 5 50 N A Application 11 4 to 12 3
220. not be set The display does not change when the INCREASE and DECREASE keys are pressed The following causes are possible The Drive is operating drive mode There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation Remove the run command and then set the parameter Parameter write enable is input This occurs when parameter write enable set value 1B is set for a multi function digital input terminal H1 01 to H1 06 If the terminal is open the Drive parameters cannot be changed Close the terminal and then set the parameters Passwords do not match Only when a password is set If the parameter A1 04 Password and A1 05 Password Setting settings are different the parameters for the initialize mode cannot be changed Enter the correct password in A1 04 If you cannot remember the password display A1 05 Password Setting by pressing the Shift Reset Key and the MENU Key simultaneously while in the A1 04 display Reset the password and input the reset password in parameter A1 04 1 through OPE11 is displayed The set value for the parameter is wrong Refer to Table 6 3 OPE Error Displays in this chapter and correct the setting 00 or CPF01 is displayed This is a digital operator communication error The connection between the digital operator and the Drive may be faulty Remove the digital operator and then re install it Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 18 If the Motor Does Not
221. ns D 3 i Related Parameters Table D 2 Serial Communication Related Parameters Control Method Parameter Parameter Name a Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Beserption Range Setting Selects the frequency reference input source 0 Operator Digital preset speed U1 01 or d1 01 to 41 17 Frequency Reference 1 Terminals Analog input terminal A1 or terminal 2 based on b1 01 Selection parameter H3 13 0to4 1 Reference Source 2 Serial Com Modbus RS 422 485 terminals R R S and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected to 2CN 4 Pulse Input Selects the run command input source 0 Operator RUN and STOP keys on digital operator b1 02 Selection 1 Terminals Contact closure on terminals S1 S2 0to3 1 2 Serial Com Modbus RS 422 485 terminals R S and 3 Option PCB Option board connected to 2CN Selects drive station node number address for Modbus terminals H5 01 Drive Node Address R S4 S The Drive s power must be cycled for the setting to Serial Comm Adr take effect Set H5 01 to 0 to disable Drive responses to Modbus communications Selects the baud rate for Modbus terminals R and S The Drive s power must be cycled for the setting to take effect Communication Speed 0 1200 bps H5 02 Selection 1 2400 bps 0to4 Serial Baud Rate 2 4800 bps 3 9600 bps 4 19200 bps Selects the communication parity for Modbus terminals R S E S D
222. ns are tight For Drive models F7U4075 thru F7U4300 set the power supply voltage jumper Insert the jumper into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply voltage The jumper is factory set to 460 Vac when shipped Be sure the power is off and the CHARGE indicator is gone out before changing the jumper setting Power tab x TES Jumper factory set position 200 V class power supply 400V class power supply Power supply input terminals CHARGE indicator Figure 4 1 Power Supply Voltage Jumper Inspect the control circuit connections including the shield and determine if a motor safety circuit is connected If normally closed these contacts may be wired in series with the RUN command contacts which are between terminals S1 and SN of the Drive No special programming is required Refer to Chapter 2 Electrical Installation Fig 2 7 Alternately these contacts could be wired between terminals S3 and SN as External Fault Inputs and may be either normally closed or normally open contacts Inspect any option cards for proper installation and wiring Refer to Chapter 2 Option Cards If Braking Resistors and or Braking Transistor Units are used check the terminal connections Refer to Chapter 2 Braking Resistors Record any other connections to the Drive using the blank terminal connection drawing in Chapter 2 Electrical Installation Fig 2 17 to det
223. nsistor Unit and its associated Remote Mount Resistor Unit is less than 33 feet 10 m 1 Mount the Braking Transistor Unit s on a vertical surface The Braking Transistor Unit requires a minimum of 1 18 inches 30 mm clearance on each side and a minimum 3 94 inches 100 mm clearance top and bottom Attach the Remote Mount Resistor Unit maintaining a minimum 1 97 inches 50 mm clearance on each side and a minimum 7 87 inches 200 mm clearance on top 2 In each Braking Transistor Unit set the nominal line voltage jumper plug to the correct setting for the installation this is factory set at the 230V 460V 575V position To access jumper plugs remove the Plexiglas cover 3 If multiple Braking Transistor Units are being installed the unit closest to the drive should have the Slave Master jumper plug set to the Master position factory setting all others must have this jumper plug set to the Slave position 4 If a single Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit are being installed connect them to the drive and exter nal control circuitry according to the chart and figure below 5 Power leads for the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generate high levels of electrical noise these power leads must be grouped separately Table 1 5 Wire Size for Remote Mount Resistor Unit and Braking Transistor Unit Wire Size AWG mm Braking Transistor Unit Main Pd 12 10 3 5 5 5 Models CDBR 2015B SMS 699V 22 MIS 2
224. ntents of the register Start and stop bits and the parity bit if one is used do not apply to the CRC During generation of the CRC each 8 bit character is exclusive OR ed with the register contents Then the result is shifted in the direction of the least significant bit LSB with a zero filled into the most significant bit MSB position The LSB is extracted and examined If the LSB is a 1 the register is then exclusive OR ed with a preset fixed balue A001h If the LSB is a 0 no exclusive OR takes place This process is repeated until eight shifts have been performed After the last eighth shift the next 8 bit byte is exclusive OR ed with the register s current value and the process repeats for eight more shifts as described above The final contents of the register after all the bytes of the message have been applied is the CRC value For applications using a host computer detailed examples of a CRC generation using Quick Basic and in C are shown on the following pages Communications D 6 Typical CRC 16 Calculation Program in Quick Basic crcsum amp HFFFF amp crcshift amp HO amp amp HA001 amp CLS PRINT PRINT PRINT CRC 16 Calculator PRINT PRINT 77878 28 28 25 25 24 tek PRINT If entering data in hex precede the data with amp H PRINT Example 32decimal 20hex amp H20 PRIN
225. nter commands 1 Enter command that enables parameter data in RAM 2 Enter command that writes data to EEPROM non volatile memory in the Drive and also enables data in RAM The following table shows the Enter command data Enter command data can only be written The Enter command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0901H Table D 7 Enter Command Register No Contents 0900H Write parameter data to EEPROM 0910H Parameter data is not written to EEPROM but refreshed in RAM only The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Drive is 100 000 Do not frequently execute Enter command 0900H written to EEPROM The Enter command registers are write only Consequently if reading these registers the register address will become invalid Error code 02H IMPORTANT Communications D 16 Error Codes The following table shows Modbus communication error codes Table D 8 Error Codes Error Function code error A function code other than 03H 08H or 10H has been set by the master Invalid register number error The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere With broadcast sending a start address other than 0000H 0001H or 0002H has been set Invalid quantity error The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range of 1 to 16 n write mode the number of data packets in the message is not No of packets x 2 Data setting error
226. ntrol output value for the motor secondary current ACR output of d axis No ACR d Output Current control output value for the motor excitation current 0 1 96 First Parameter Causing an OPE co rr ree re eo OPE Detected pe n 01 35 Zero Servo Pulse Count Number of PG pulses times 4 for the movement range when Zero Servo Pulse stopped at zero servo PID Input Input error to the PID regulator PID Input PID Setpoint PID Feedback 0 016 U PID Output Output of the PID regulator as a percentage of maximum PID Output frequency 1 04 Parameters A 41 Table 2 F7 Monitor List Continued Parameter Parameter Name i i Description Display Units Digital Operator Display PID Setpoint 01 38 PID Setpoint Setpoint of the PID regulator PID reference PID bias 0 01 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Time Total operating time of the heatsink cooling fan Modbus serial communication error codes 00000000 41 CRC error L Data length error L Not used Always 0 Memobus Communication Error Code L Parity error Transmit Err 1 Overrun error 1 Fleming error 1 Timeover Not used Always 0 01 39 01 40 FAN Elapsed Time Heatsink Temperature T Cooling Fin Temperature Temperature of heatsink Output from the speed control l
227. o 39 2 80 11 4 to 12 3 E 250 X 2P 125 X 2P 4 0 X 2P 100 X 2P Application Dependent 2 0 X 2P 70 X 2P li 912 1 25 350 X 2P 200 X 2P 300 X 2P 150 X 2P Application Dependent 300 X 2P 150 X 2P S L2 T L3 1 RLU SUL21 T1 L31 276 2 to 344 8 U T1 V T2 W T3 PST TTA to 95 0 a 276 2 to 344 8 31 4 to 39 2 TTA to 95 0 8 8 to 10 8 R LI S L2 T L3 1 81121 T1 L31 U T1 V T2 W T3 314 to 39 2 276 2 to 344 8 314 to 39 2 11 4 to 12 3 hi sb 1 3 to 1 4 1 Wire size range provided for drives using insulated screw type terminal blocks 2 Recommended wire sizes are based on the normal duty ND current ratings and NEC Article 310 Table 310 16 75 degree Celsius copper or equivalent When sizing wiring based on the heavy duty HD current ratings consult NEC Article 430 and any other applicable codes w g s s T s s 4 0 X 2P R L1 S L2 T L3 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 E MIO 60225 3 0 X2P UL Approved U T1 V T2 W T3 N A vinyl sheathed 80 X 2P d 276210 344 8 3 0 X 2P Qrequivarent ES 2075 31 4 to 39 2 80 X 2P MI2 s MI2 s s 1 25 Electrical Installation 2 4 Table 2 2 480Vac Wire Sizes Connector Specifications Clamping Wire Size Recommended Terminal Torque Range AWG Wire Size AWG Screws Ib in mm mm 2 512 T
228. o be increased Sets the maximum current to be drawn during an HSB stop Higher n3 02 settings will shorten motor stopping times but cause increased motor current and therefore increased motor heating Sets the amount of time the Drive will dwell at 1 09 Minimum Frequency at the end of deceleration If this time is set too low the machine inertia can cause the motor to rotate slightly after the HSB stop is complete and the Drive output is shut off Sets the time required for an HSB overload fault OL7 to occur when the Drive output frequency does not change for some reason during an HSB stop Normally this does not need to be adjusted Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 36 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name ne Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting Ea Flux Vector Vector Sa Feed Forward Selects the feed forward control This function reduces speed Feed Forward Control deviation during rapid speed changes n5 01 Selection 0 Disabled Feedfoward Sel 218496 1 Enabled Motor Acceleration Time This function sets the motor rated acceleration time in seconds for 0 001 to n5 02 E 10 000 Motor Accel Time feed forward control Feed Forward Proportional Sets the proportional gain for feed forward control 0 00 to n5 03 Gain Speed response will i ase as the setti f N5 03 is i ased 100 00 Feedfoward Gai
229. ons due to noise The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in parameter F1 05 The factory preset is for forward rotation A phase advancement Fig 2 23 PG B2 Wiring B Wiring the PG D2 Wiring examples are provided in Fig 2 24 for the PG D2 Branch Circuit Protection Power supply 12 V Power supply 0 V Power supply 5 V Pulse input A phase Pulse input A phase b ele de Pulse monitor output Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for signal lines Do not use the PG D2 s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters Fig 2 24 PG D2 Wiring Electrical Installation 2 40 B Wiring the PG X2 Wiring examples are provided in Fig 2 25 for the PG X2 Power supply 12 V Power supply 0 V 21 Power supply 5 V pulse input t Kphase pulse input B phase pulse input B phase pulse input Z phase pulse input Y Z phase pulse input TT E ee ooo A phase pulse monitor output B phase pulse monitor output Z phase pulse monitor output Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for signal lines
230. ontrast and a setting of 5 is the darkest contrast Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters 37 Parameter No Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Local Remote Key Function Selection Local Remote Key STOP Key Function Selection Oper STOP Key User Parameter Default Value User Defaults Drive kVA Selection Inverter Model Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection Operator M O P Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Discon nected Oper Detection Cumulative Operation Time Setting Elapsed Time Set Cumulative Operation Time Selection Elapsed Time Run Initialization Specification Selection Init Mode Sel Cumulative Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting Fan ON Time Set Fault Trace Fault History Clear Function FLT Trace Init kWh User Monitor Initialization kWH MonitorClear Table A1 F7 Parameter List Continued Description Key Selections Determines if the Digital Operator Local Remote key is functional 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Determines if the STOP key on the digital operator will stop the Drive when Drive is operating from external terminals or serial communication 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Allows storing of parameter settings as a User Initialization Selection 0 No Change 1 Set Defaults Saves current parameter settings as user initializa tion 1 03 now allows selecting lt 1110 gt for user initialization and
231. ooling Fan Opera tion Delay Time Fan Delay Time Ambient Temperature Setting Ambient Temp Denotes that parameter can be changed when L8 11 L8 12 Table A1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Open Loop Vector Setting Range Factory Description Setting Torque Limit Flux Vector 200 Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque Four individual quadrants can be set 200 Output torque Positive torque No of motor Reverse rotations 200 Forward Negative torque Selects the DB protection only when using 3 duty heatsink mount Yaskawa braking resistor This parameter does not enable or disable DB function of the Drive 0 Not Provided 1 Provided When the cooling fin temperature exceeds the value set in this parameter an overheat alarm OH will occur Selects the drive operation upon an OH pre alarm detection 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only Selects the detection of input current phase loss power supply voltage imbalance or main circuit electrostatic capacitor deterioration 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Selects the detection of output current open phase When applied motor capacity is too small for Drive capacity out put phase loss may be detected inadvertently In this case set to 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Enables and disables the Drive s output ground fault detection 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Controls t
232. oop ASR before the ASR 01 44 ASR output primary delay filter C5 06 100 is displayed for rated sec 0 01 ASR Output w Fil ondary current of the motor Feed forward control output Output from feed forward control 100 is displayed for rated 01 45 z 0 01 FF Cout Output secondary current of the motor 1 Parameters 42 F7 Fault T List F7 Fault History List Table F7 Fault Trace List Table 4 F7 Fault History List Fault Trace Fault History Current Fault U3 01 Most Recent Fault nd Previous Fault 21 Most Recent Fault ET i Fault Mesage Z d 5 2 02 03 Frequency Reference at Previous Fault U3 03 EM Frequency Ref ault Message h U2 04 Output Frequency at Previous Fault U3 04 t Most Recent Fault Output Freq ault Message 4 U2 05 Output Current at Previous Fault U3 05 Cumulative Operation Time at Most Recent Fault Output Current Elapsed Time 1 Motor Speed at Previous Fault Cumulative Operation Time at 27 Most Recent Fault U2 06 Motor Speed 1306 Elapsed Time 2 U2 07 Output Voltage at Previous Fault U3 07 Cumulative Operation Time at 34 Most Recent Fault Output Voltage Elapsed Time 3 DC Bus Voltage at Previous Fault U3 08 Cumulative Operation Time at 4 Most Recent Fault 02 08 DC Bus Voltage Elapsed Time 4 h 02 09 Output Power at Previous Fault U3 09 SR Output kWatts ault Message th Torque Reference at Previous Fault U3 10 6 Most Recent Fault Torque Reference Fa
233. operations below Fig 3 4 to access the Fault Trace parameter list DRIVE Rdy DRIVE Rdy DRIVE Rdy Monitor Fault Trace Current Fault ESC Mo m gt 01 02 0 00Hz None None U1 03 0 00A U2 03 0 00Hz U2 03 0 00Hz Fig 3 4 U2 Fault Trace List Access Procedure Use and keys to scroll through the U2 Fault Trace parameter list 2 09 Output Kilowatts at Fault U 02 11 Input Terminal Status at Fault U 2 12 Output Terminal Status at Fault U2 13 Operation Status at Fault U2 14 Elapsed Time at Fault Digital Operator 3 9 B U3 Fault History List After viewing the Fault Trace parameter list follow the key operations below Fig 3 5 to access the Fault History parameter list DRIVE Rdy DRIVE Rdy DRIVE Rdy Fault Trace Fault History Last Fault ESC 1 8 0 gt 03 None E None U2 03 0 00A Fig 3 5 U3 Fault History Access Procedure Use and keys to scroll through the U3 Fault History parameter list Table 3 10 Fault History List Fault History Parameters J3 01 Last Fault J3 02 Fault Message 2 J3 03 Fault Message 3 J3 04 Fault Message 4 J3 05 Elapsed Time 1 J3 06 Elapsed Time 2 J3 07 Elapsed Time 3 J3 08 Elapsed Time 4 J3 09 Fault Message 5 J3 10 Fault Message 6 J3 11 Fault Message 7 J3 12 Fault Message 8 J3 13 Fault Message 9 J3 14 Fault Message 10 J3 15 Elapsed Time 5 J3 16 Elapsed Time 6 73 57 Elapsed Time 7 J3 18
234. option boards to the Drive CPF22 Unrecognizable option board Option Board Code Number Fault was connected to the control Perform a factory initialization Option Type Err board Replace the option board Replace the control board Remove power to the Drive An option board was not Reconnect the option board conta boa oran Perform a factory initialization CPF23 Option Board Interconnection Fault board OE oe Option DPRAM Err oard that was not made for Cycle power to the Drive the Drive was attached to the control board Replace the option board Replace the control board Option board input fault Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 3 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing continued Digital Description Cause Corrective Action Operator Display The load was too large Reduce the load The acceleration or uu deceleration time was too Excessive Speed Deviation and deceleration time short Detected when F1 04 0 to 2 and in Flux DEV Vector control method A1 02 3 The load was locked Check the mechanical system d Deviation The speed deviation is greater than the set mS The settings 1 10 ting F1 10 for a time longer than the set Check the settings 1 10 and ting in F1 11 F1 11 were not appropriate for 1 11 Lengthen the acceleration time the application Check for open circuit when using brake motor Check for an ex
235. ote Mount Resistor Units are being installed connect them to the drive and to external circuitry according to the figure below PART USER SUPPLIED EXTERNAL C TRANSISTOR LIMIT 4 Notes 1 Connect only the number of braking transistor units and remote mount resistor units required for the application 2 Fuses required only if UL CUL certification is needed See separate instruction sheet 02Y 00025 0393 for details Fig 2 10 Wiring Multiple Braking Transistor Units and Remote Mount Resistor Units to Drive F7U2022 thru F7U2110 and F7U4022 thru F7U4300 Electrical Installation 2 19 6 IMPORTANT After wiring test insulation resistance of each braking transistor unit remote mount resistor unit with a 900V megger as follows a Disconnect leads between the Braking Transistor Unit and the drive If equipment with semiconductors is connected across terminals 1 amp 2 of the Braking Transistor Unit remove the wiring b Connect common leads jumpers across Braking Transistor Unit terminals N P Po and B and across 3 amp 4 as shown in figure below c Measure the insulation resistance at points a b and c in Fig 2 11 below with the megger MOUNT BRAKING RESISTOR TRANSISTOR UNIT Fig 2 11 Braking Transistor Unit Jumper and Megger Points Adjustments 7 drives Program Parameter L3 04 to 0 to disable stall prevention during deceleration 8 Only with Heat
236. p level The DC bus voltage has exceeded the trip Power factor correction capacitors are being used on the input or output to the Drive There was a break in the PG Fix the broken disconnected wiring wiring PG Disconnection PGO Detected when F1 02 3 and 1 02 1 or The PG was wired incorrectly 3 PG Open Detected when PG encoder pulses Power wasn t being supplied to Subelvsdwertothe B Flashing received for a time longer than the setting in the PG eee 1 14 Check for open circuit when using brake motor Remove the power factor correction capacitors Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 11 Table 6 2 Alarm Displays and Processing continued Digital Operator Display Ensure the values in L6 02 and UL3 Undertorque Detection 1 L6 03 are appropriate Undertorg Det 1 Drive output current lt L6 02 for more than Motor was underloaded TEN Flashing the time set in L6 03 when L6 01 5 or 6 Check application machine status to eliminate fault Ensure the values in L6 05 and UL4 Undertorque Detection 2 L6 06 are appropriate Undertorg Det 2 Drive output current lt L6 05 for more than Motor was underloaded m Flashing the time set L6 06 when L6 04 5 or 6 Check application machine status to eliminate fault Check the input circuit and DC Bus Undervoltage P increase the input power to The DC bus voltage is lt L2 05 S L2 and T L3 within
237. parameter L6 05 for more time than is set in parameter L6 06 1A Reverse Direction Closed When the drive is running in the reverse direction 1B Baseblock 2 N C Open When drive is not outputting voltage 1C Motor 2 Selection Closed When motor 2 is selected by multi function input motor 2 selection 1D Regenerating Closed When in regenerating mode 1E Restart Enabled Closed When the drive is performing an automatic restart attempt Automatic restart is configured by parameter L5 01 1F Overload OL1 Closed When OL function is at 90 of its trip point or greater 20 OH Alarm Closed When the Drive s heatsink temperature exceeds the Terminal M5 M6 Function setting of parameter L8 02 Selection 30 During Torque Limit when in speed control 0 to 38 2 A A A A Term M5 M6 Sel Closed When in torque limit 31 During Speed Limit Closed When in speed limit 32 During Speed Limit when in torque control Closed When motor frequency is at the speed limit value when running in torque control 33 Zero Servo Complete Closed 2 When Zero Servo is complete within the b9 02 zero servo completion width 37 During Operation Closed When drive is operating except during baseblock or DC braking 38 Drive Enable Closed When the drive enable input is active Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 25 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method 2727 Par
238. pare Parts This appendix lists the primary spare parts that may be needed to maintain or service the Drive F7 Primary Spare Parts 208 230 240 F 2 F7 Primary Spare Parts 480 F 3 Spare Parts F 1 F7 Primary Spare Parts 208 230 240 Drive Model H Power PCB Gate Drive PCB Control PCB Terminal PCB Diode Module CIMR F7U 1 2 7 618390 53010 618410 Inside the Power Module ETC618390 S3010 ETC618410 Inside the Power Module 22 2 23 7 617042 618390 53010 ETC618410 SID003113 D1 25P5 p 1 3 5 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 N N N N N 2018 2022 2030 2037 Table 1 208 240 F7 Primary Spare Parts Continued m am STROOISOS QH oss us STRODE QD FU FU E 60 U U U U FU A 2 7 5 i D Spare Parts F 2 F7 Primary Spare Parts 480 Seer e See ee ea mem CIMR F7U 1 2 sw users NA ETCO18300 83010 EICOI8410__ Inside the Power Module NA Inside the Power Module UL gt 5 NA EFCSISS90 3010
239. peed search current detection mode is complete Sets the drive s DC Bus undervoltage trip level If this is set lower than the factory setting additional AC input reactance or DC bus reactance may be necessary Consult the factory before changing this parameter setting Undervoltage Detection Sets the time required to decelerate to zero speed when a KEB command is input from a multi function input Set the time in seconds to accelerate to the set speed after recovery from a momentary power loss If setting 0 0 then active accerleration time is used instead Momentary Recovery Time UV Return Time Sets the percentage of output frequency reduction at the beginning of deceleration when a KEB command is input from multi function input Reduction slip frequency before KEB operation x L2 08 x 2 Frequency Reduction Gain at KEB Start KEB Decel Time Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 31 Control Method Open Loop Vector 0 1 to j 0 00 to n dant kVA Depen A A A A dant kVA Depen A A A A dant 150 to 190 0 0 to Hii Setting Range Factory Setting Flux Vector 0 0 to 5 0sec Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Stall Prevention Selection During Accel StallP Accel Sel Stall Prevention Level During Acceleration StallP Accel Lvl Stall Prevention Limit During Acceleration StallP CHP Lvl Stal
240. pensation Limit C3 03 Comp Limit C3 04 C3 05 Slip Compensation Selection During Regeneration Slip Comp Regen Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection V Out Limit Torque Compensation Gain Torq Comp Gain Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Torq Comp Time Torque Compensation at Forward Start TorqCmp Start Torque Compensation for Reverse TorqCmp Reverse Torque Compensation Time Constant Torque Comp Const T Denotes that parameter can be changed when Table A1 F7 Parameter List Continued Description Motor Slip Compensation This parameter is used to increase motor speed to account for motor slip by boosting the output frequency If the speed is lower than the frequency reference increase C3 01 If the speed is higher than the frequency reference decrease C3 01 This parameter adjusts the filter on the output of the slip compensation function Increase to add stability decrease to improve response This parameter sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function It is set as a percentage of motor rated slip E2 02 Determines whether slip compensation is enabled or disabled dur ing regenerative operation 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Determines if the motor magnetic flux is automatically decreased when output voltage saturation occurs 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Torque Compensation This parameter sets the gain for the Drive s automatic torque boost function to match
241. peration 0 to 200 120 current as percentage of drive rated current Used only when b3 01 2 or 3 Sets the deceleration time during 0 1 to 2 0sec A A speed search 10 0 Delays the speed search operation after a momentary power loss to 0 0 to 0 2sec allow time for an external output contactor to re energize 20 0 Sets the gain for the frequency at which the Drive starts speed 1 00 to 110 estimation speed search Use only when 63 01 0 1 1 20 This parameter enables the Drive to detect the direction of rotation of the motor during speed search 0 Disable Drive uses frequency reference direction Oto d 1 Enable Drive uses detected direction Say Delay Timers Timer Function ON Delay Time Delay ON Timer Timer Function OFF Delay Time Delay OFF Timer Used in conjunction with a multi function digital input and a multi function digital output programmed for the timer function This 0 0 to 0 0sec A A A A sets the amount of time between when the digital input is closed 3000 0 TO and the digital output is energized Used in conjunction with a multi function digital input and a multi function digital output programmed for the timer function This 0 0 to 0 0sec A A sets the amount of time the output stays energized after the digital 3000 0 TN input is opened PID Contra PID Function Setting PID Mode This parameter determines the function of the PID control 0 Disable
242. period The date stamp is located on the lower right side of the Drive PRDN 00 7 22 pr 55 Inspector Fig 6 1 Date Stamp Location dc Manufacture Date Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 29 Notes Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 30 7 Maintenance This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection of the Drive Please refer to these instructions to ensure that the Drive receives the proper maintenance to maintain overall performance 7 2 Preventive Maintenance 7 3 Periodic Maintenance of 7 4 Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement 7 5 Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card 7 7 Maintenance 7 1 Periodic Inspection Check the following items during periodic maintenance The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises There should be no abnormal heat generation from the Drive or motor The ambient temperature should be within the Drive specification of 10 C to 40 14 F to 104 F The output current value shown on U1 03 should not be higher than the motor or Drive rated current for an extended period of time The cooling fan in the Drive should be operating normally Before attempting any maintenance checks
243. r A3 programmed for Overheating of motor as C1 01 and C1 02 OH3 motor temperature H3 09 or H3 05 E Motor Overheat 1 measured by the motor otor exceeds 1 17 for time L1 05 and L1 03 thermistor Recheck VIP patter E 1 01 0 to 2 thru E1 13 Recheck the motor rated current value E2 01 Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load Motor Overheating Recheck the accel decel time Detected when 2 programmed for Overheating of motor as C1 01 and 02 Motor Overheat 2 motor temperature H3 09 or H3 05 E measured by the motor otor exceeds 2 34V for time L1 05 and L1 03 thermistor V F pattern SLUT 0 to 2 thru E1 13 Recheck the motor rated current value E2 01 The load was too large The Recheck the cycle time and the cycle time was too short at the size of the load as well as the Motor Overload accel decel time times set in C1 01 and C1 02 Detected when L1 01 1 to 3 and the OL1 Drive s output current exceeded the motor The voltage of the V F Motor Overloaded overload curve pattern was incorrect for the The overload curve is adjustable using application parameter BaO LIO Motor rated current setting Check the motor rated current was improper value in E2 01 Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the times set in C1 01 and C1 02 Review the V F pattern parameters E1 01 thru E1 13 The load
244. r Yaskawa representative before using 12 pulse rectification Electrical Installation 2 10 Cable Length between Drive Motor If the cable between the Drive and the motor is long the high frequency leakage current will increase causing the Drive output current to increase as well This may affect peripheral devices To prevent this reduce cable length or if necessary adjust the carrier frequency set in parameter C6 02 as shown in Table 2 6 Table 2 6 Motor Cable Length vs Carrier Frequency Motor Cable Length 164 ft 60m maximum 328 ft 100m maximum More than 328 ft 100m i Ground Wiring Observe the following precautions when connecting the ground wire 1 208 240Vac Drives should have a ground connection with resistance of less than 1000 2 480Vac Drives should have a ground connection with resistance of less than 100 3 Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or large current electrical equipment 4 Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire Leakage current flows through the Drive Therefore if the distance between the ground rod and the ground terminal is too long potential on the ground terminal of the Drive could develop 5 When using more than one Drive be careful not to loop the ground wire See Fig 2 4 OK NO M Fig 2 4 Ground Wiring
245. r any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual Intended Use Drives are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery For use in the European Union the installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Voltage Directive EN 50178 1997 10 Equipping of Power Systems with Electronic Devices EN 60201 1 1997 12 Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices Part 1 General Requirements 60204 1 1997 EN 61010 1997 11Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment IEC 950 1991 A1 1992 2 1993 A3 1995 A4 1996 modified CE certification per EN 50178 can be achieved using the line filters specified in this manual and following the appropriate installation instructions Introduction This section describes the applicability of the manual This manual is applicable to F7 Drives defined by model numbers of CIMR F7UL _JLILIE The F7 Drive is a Pulse Width Modulated Drive for AC 3 Phase induction motors This type of Drive is also known as an Adjustable Frequency Drive Variable Frequency Drive AC Drive AFD ASD VFD VSD and Inverter In this manual the F7 Drive will be referred to as the Drive The LCD keypad operator is equipped with local remote functions copy feature 7 language choices and 5 lines of display with 16 characters per line User parameter settings can be recovered at any t
246. r of PG pulses depends on the model of PG Speed Control Board being used Set the correct number for your model PG A2 PG B2 The maximum response frequency is 32 767 Hz Use a PG that outputs a maximum frequency of approximately 20 kHz for the rotational speed of the motor Motor speed at maximum frequency output min x PG rating p rev 60 g p rev fpa Hz Some examples of PG output frequency number of pulses for the maximum frequency output are shown in Table 2 23 Table 2 23 PG Pulse Selection Examples Motor s Maximum Speed RPM PG Rating PPR PG Output Frequency Hz 18 000 20 000 20 000 18 000 A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA If momentary power loss must be handled use a backup capacitor or other method See Fig 2 27 PG power supply fours 12V j Capacitor for momentary power loss er 12 V Signals Fig 2 27 PG B2 Connection Example For External 12V PG Power Supply Electrical Installation 2 44 PG D2 PG X2 PG W2 maximum response frequency is 300 kHz Use the following equation to computer the output frequency of the PG fpo Motor speed at maximum frequency output min x PG rating p rev Hz 60 A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA If momentary power loss must be handled use a backup capacitor or oth
247. ratings for the Drive are the rated input and output current overload capacity carrier frequency current limit and maximum output frequency Parameter C6 01 must be set to value of 0 for Heavy Duty ratings and 2 for Normal Duty ratings Factory default is Heavy Duty C6 01 0 4 Horsepower ratings are based on 230V NEC Table 430 150 Sb 3 gt s 5 Z 0 270 0 0 EN 0 50 ES 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480Vac 50 60 Hz Power supply characteristics Control characteristics Specifications 3 Table 2 480 Drive Specifications Continued Model Number CIMR F7U 4030 4037 4045 4055 4075 4090 4110 4132 4160 4185 4220 4300 3 MEA 46 0 57 0 69 0 85 0 110 0 140 0 1600 200 0 2300 280 0 3900 510 0 Horsepower 3 4 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Rated output current 60 0 75 0 91 0 112 0 150 0 180 0 216 0 260 0 304 0 370 0 506 0 675 0 Overload capacity 150 of rated output current for 60 seconds Current limit 150 of rated output current Carrier frequency 2kHz Maximum output gt 300 0 Hz frequency 3 51 0 59 0 73 0 950 120 0 140 0 180 0 200 0 230 0 315 0 390 0 510 0 Horsepower 3 4 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Rated output current 67 2 77 0 125 0 156 0 180 0 240 0 260 0 304 0 4
248. rator copy functions Copy Allowed Selection ea 03 02 0 Disabled digital operator copy functions are allowed Otol Read Allowable 1 Enabled Copying allowed Auto Tuning Selects which set of motor parameters are to be used and set during T1 00 Motor Selection 1 2 auto tuning 1 2 Select Motor 1 El to E2 motor 1 2 E3 to E4 motor 2 Selects the auto tuning mode Antotininz node 0 Rotational autotuning A1 02 2 or 3 01 Tunin Ma Sel 1 Stationary autotuning 1 02 2 or 3 0102 2 Terminal resistance only stationary auto tuning 1 02 0 1 2 or 3 Motor Rated Power Set the motor rated power in kilowatts kW 0 00 to T1 02 Mtr Rated Power NOTE If motor power is given in horsepower power in kW can 650 00 be calculated using the following formula kW Hp 0 746 kW 230 Vac T1 03 Motor rated voltage Set the motor rated voltage in Volts V 00 to or Rated Voltage 510 0 460Vac kVA Motor Rated Current 1 04 Rated Current Set the motor rated current in Amperes A dent Motor Base Frequency n 1 05 Base Frequency Set the base frequency of the motor in Hertz Hz 400 0 60 0 Hz Number of Motor Poles oo Number of Poles d Ld me mm oa a Motor Base Speed 0 to 1750 T1 07 Rated Speed Set the base speed of the motor in revolutions per minute RPM 24000 T1 08 Number of PG Pulses Set the number of pulses per revolution PPR for
249. rease to improve response 2 00 Filter Avg Time Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 28 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Parameter Name Digital Operator Display as Analog Outputs Selects which monitor will be output on terminals FM and FC 1 Frequency Reference 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 2 Output Frequency 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 3 Output Current 00 drive rated current 5 Motor Speed 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 6 Output Voltage 00 200 400Vac depending on Drive voltage rating 7 DC Bus Voltage 00 400 800Vdc depending on Drive voltage rating 8 Output kWatts 00 Drive rated power 9 Torque Reference 00 Motor rated torque Terminal 1 Input Level 100 10 4 Terminal A2 Input Level 100 10Vdc or 20mA Terminal A3 Input Level 100 10Vdc Motor Secondary Current 100 Motor rated secondary current Motor Excitation Current 100 Motor rated secondary current SFS Output 100 Maximum output frequency E1 04 ASR Input 100 Maximum output frequency E1 04 ASR Output 100 Maximum output frequency E1 04 PID Feedback 100 Maximum output frequency E1 04 Output Voltage Reference Vq 100 E1 05 default 240V or 480V Output Voltage Reference Vd 100 E1 05 default 240V 480V Not Used PID Input 100 Maximum output frequency E1 04 PID Output 100 Maximum o
250. ring Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault UL4 at RUN Fault Undertorque Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault T Detection Level 2 Sets the overtorque undertorque detection level as a percentage of L6 05 Que MEC Drive rated current or torque for torque detection 2 Current for 0 to 300 1596 A A A A Torque Detection Selection 2 Torq Det 2 Sel Torq Det 2 Ll A1 02 0 or 1 Torque for A1 02 2 or 3 2 Torque Detection Time 2 Sets the length of time an overtorque undertorque condition must 0 0 to 15 06 Torq Det 2 Time exist before torque detection 2 is recognized by the drive 10 0 10 0 Denotes that parameter be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 34 Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Parameter No Forward Torque Limit Torq Limit Fwd Reverse Torque Limit Torq Limit Rev Forward Regenerative Torque Limit Torq Lmt Fwd Rgn Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit Torq Lmt Rev Rgn Internal Dynamic Braking Resistor Protection Selection DB Resistor Prot Overheat Alarm Level Pre Alarm Lvl Overheat Pre Alarm Opera tion Selection OH Pre Alarm Sel L8 02 Input Phase Loss Protection Selection Ph Loss In Sel Output Phase Loss Protection Ph Loss Out Sel Output Ground Fault Detec tion Selection Ground Fault Sel Heatsink Cooling Fan Opera tion Selection Fan On Off Sel Heatsink C
251. rive s power must be cycled for the setting to take Communication Parity H5 03 Selection 0102 Serial Com Sel DNO Panty 1 Even Parity 2 Odd Parity Selects the stopping method when a communication timeout fault CE is detected Stopping Method After 0 Ramp to Stop H5 04 Communication Error 1 Coast to Stop 0to3 Serial Fault Sel 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only 4 Run at D1 04 Enables or disables the communications timeout fault CE Communication Fault 0 Disabled A communication loss will not cause a H5 05 Detection Selection communication fault Serial Flt Dtct 1 Enabled If communication is lost for more than 2 seconds a CE fault will occur H5 06 Drive Transmit Wait Time Set the delay time from when the drive receives data to when the Transmit WaitTIM drive sends data RTS Control Selection Enables disables request to send RTS control H5 07 RTS Control Sel 0 Disabled RTS is always on 1 Enabled RTS turns on only when sending Modbus communication can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1 01 and b1 02 Monitor the operation status of the Drive Set and read Drive parameters Reset faults Input multi function digital input commands Control multi function digital and analog outputs OR operation is performed between the multi function command from the master device and the IMPORTANT command input from multi function digital input terminals S3
252. rse the above procedure to attach all of the components When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket be sure that the air flow goes toward the top of the Drive Air flow direction Fan cover Control PCB bracket Control Gate driver Fig 7 2 Cooling Fan Assembly Replacement Procedure Maintenance 7 6 Removing and Mounting the Terminal The terminal card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the control wiring Always confirm that input power is removed and the Charge LED is not lit before removing or mounting the IMPORTANT terminal card mRemoving the Terminal Card 1 Remove the terminal cover on the Drive 2 Remove the Digital Operator and front cover from the Drive 3 4 Loosen the mounting screws on the left and right sides of the terminal card until they are free It is not necessary to remove Remove the wires connected to FE and or NC on the terminal card the mounting screws completely They are captive and self rising Pull the terminal card out in the direction of the block arrow mMounting the Terminal Card Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card Confirm that the terminal card and the Control PCB properly meet at connector 8 before insertion The connector pins may be damaged if the terminal card is forced into place possibly preventing correct Drive operation Mounting Screw
253. run Stopping Method B 01 03 Stopping Method Selection SENE Ramp to Stop factory default DC Injection to Stop Coast to Stop with Timer There are four methods of stopping the Drive when the RUN command is removed 0 Ramp to stop When the run command is removed the Drive will decelerate the motor to minimum output frequency E1 09 and then shut off The rate of deceleration is determined by the active deceleration time The factory default Decel Time is parameter C1 02 When the output frequency has dropped below the DC Injection Start Frequency b2 01 or the minimum output frequency E1 09 whichever is greater deceleration will stop and DC current will be injected into the motor at the current level set in b2 02 for the time set in b2 04 Basic Programming 5 5 DC Injection Start Frequency b2 01 100 DC Injection Brake Time when Stopping b2 04 Output Frequency Deceleration Time C1 02 ___ gt DC Injection Braking 0 Fig 5 3 Deceleration to Stop The actual deceleration time can be determined by the following formula Output frequency at time of stop command Time to stop x Active deceleration time Maximum frequency 1 04 IMPORTANT If S Curve characteristics are set in the Drive programming they will add to the total time to stop 1 Coast to stop When the run command is removed the Drive will turn off i
254. running Parameters 5 Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Speed Search Selection SpdSrch at Start Speed Search Deactivation Current SpdSrch Current c T Speed Search Deceleration Time SpdSrch Dec Time Speed Search Detection Compensation Gain Srch Detect Comp Bi directional Speed Search Selection Bidir Search Sel Speed Search Delay Time Search Delay Table A1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Open Loop Vector Setting Factory Doserptiah Range Setting Flux Vector Speed Search Enables disables and selects the speed search function at start 0 Speed Estimation Speed Search Disable Speed search at start is disabled estimated speed method is used for multi function input power loss ride through auto fault retry Speed Estimation Speed Search Enable Speed search is enabled at run command Current Detection Speed Search Disable Speed search at start is disabled current detection method is used for multi 03 2 function input power loss ride through auto fault retry 3 Current Detection Speed Search Enable Speed search is enabled at run command Speed Estimation Method Actual motor speed and direction is estimated Then the motor is ramped from that speed to the commanded speed Current Detection Method Current level is monitored while put frequency is ramped down Used only when b3 01 2 2 or 3 Sets the speed search o
255. ry Range Setting Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Description Torque Detection Determines the drive s response to an overtorque undertorque condition Overtorque and Undertorque are determined by the settings in parameters L6 02 and L6 03 The multi function output settings B and 17 in the H2 parameter group are also active if programmed 0 Disabled OL3 at Speed Agree Alarm Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Operation continues after detection OL3 at RUN Alarm Overtorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection OL3 at SpeedAgree Fault Overtorque Detection only active TY Torque Detection Selection 1 Ded Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an OL3 Torg Det Sel OL3 at RUN Fault Overtorque Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault UL3 at SpeedAgree Alarm Undertorque Detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation continues after detection UL3 at RUN Alarm Undertorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection UL3 at Speed Agree Fault Undertorque Detection only active Flux Vector during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault UL3 at RUN Fault Undertorque Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault T Detection Level 1 Sets the overtorque undertorque detection level as
256. s 100 10 V 110 0to AO Chl Bias Ex Set F4 05 50 to output 0 at 5 0V output 110 0 EE 2 7 Channel 2 Sets the channel 2 bias 100 10 V 110 0to AO Ch 2 Bias Ex Set F4 06 50 to output 0 at 5 0V output 110 0 AO 12 Channel 1 Signal Sets the range of the voltage output Level 0 0 to 10 Vdc 0 1 Analog Monitor Level Ch1 1 10 to 10 Vdc AO 12 Channel 2 Signal Sets the range of the voltage output Otol Level 0 0 to 10 Vdc Analog Monitor Level Ch2 1 10 to 10 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 19 Parameter No See DO 02 08 Setup F5 09 F6 01 F6 02 F6 03 F6 04 F6 05 F6 06 Parameter Name Digital Operator Display DO 02 DO 08 Channel 1 Output Selection DO Chi Select DO 02 DO 08 Channel 2 Output Selection DO Ch2 Select DO 08 Channe Selection DO Ch3 Select DO 08 Channe Selection DO Select DO 08 Channe Selection DO Ch5 Select DO 08 Channe Selection DO Ch6 Select DO 08 Channe Selection DO Ch7 Select DO 08 Channe Selection DO Ch8 Select 3 4 Out 5 Out 6 Out 7 Out 8 20 08 Output Mode Selection DO 08 Select Operation Selection after Communication Error Comm Bus Fit Sel Selection of External Fault from Communication Option Board EF0 Detection Stopping Method for External Fault from Communication Option Board EFO0 Fault Action Trace Sampling from Com
257. s 1 2 3 4 00 Motor rated torque 14 Torque Compensation 00 Motor rated torque 15 FWD REV Torque Limit Quadrants 1 and 3 00 Motor rated torque 1F Not Used Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 27 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Dosenpton Range Setting M ee Flux Vector yeetor H3 06 Terminal A3 Gain Setting 424 0 0 to Terminal A3 Gain ae 1000 0 ve H3 07 Terminal A3 Bias Settin 1000 Crp Sets the frequency reference when is input to 0 0 A A A A Terminal Bias 100 0 Terminal A2 Signal Level Selects the signal level of terminal A2 8 0 0 to I0Vdc switch 51 2 must in the off position H3 08 Selection 0102 2 Term 2 Signal 1 10 to 10Vdc switch 1 2 must be in the off position 18 2 4 to 20 mA switch 51 2 must be in on position Terminal A2 Function Selec Selects the function of terminal A2 H3 09 tion Oto IF 0 A A A A 5 Same choices as Terminal Function Selection H3 05 Terminal A2 Sel H3 10 Terminal A2 Gain Setting a 0 0 to H3 11 Terminal A2 Bias Setting gt Analog Input Filter Time ES b 3 12 Constant This parameter adjusts the filter on all 3 analog inputs Increase to 0 00 to 0 30sec A A Y A add stability dec
258. s by model 150 for 1 min 150 2KHz 300 Hz Extended rating Approx 110 for 1 min High Duty varies by model varies by model 120 varies by model See Drive Specifications This manual references the various Drive capacities according to its model number CIMR F7U L JE See Drive Output Specifications Table i 2 on the following page for rated capacities and Drive specifications Drive Output Specifications The standard Drive specifications are listed in the following tables 208 240Vac Table 1 2 208 240Vac viis e n eb 5 a 3 a 8 s o Heavy Duty Normal Duty Rated ouput 1 6 2 7 3 7 5 7 8 8 12 0 17 0 22 0 27 0 32 0 44 0 55 0 69 0 82 0 110 0 130 0 160 0 capacity KVA Ert Tem 0 75 1 1 5 2 3 10 20 30 40 50 60 100 125 150 Rat d tput Fs wu 41 70 15 0 23 0 31 0 450 58 0 71 85 0 115 0 145 0 180 0 215 283 0 346 0 415 0 current lt Overload capacity 150 of rated output current for 60 seconds 150 of rated output current Carrier frequency 2kHz Maximum output 300 0 Hz frequency Rated output 1 4 1 8 3 0 4 1 6 4 8 8 12 0 18 0 23 0 29 0 34 0 44 0 62 0 73 0 82 0 120 0 140 0 160 0 capacity kVA Horsepower 23 Horsepower 23 23 0 0 5 0 75 75 1 1 5 2 10 20 30 50 60 100 125 150 150 Rated output 52
259. s displayed press the ENTER key to display U1 34 OPE fault constant This monitor will display the parameter that is causing the OPE error Table 6 3 OPE Error Displays Digital Operator dim Corrective OPEO1 Selection The control board was replaced and Enter the correct kVA setting 02 04 Drive kVA Setting Error the kVA parameter is set incor by referring to the Drive model rectly number in Appendix B OPE02 Parameter setting was outside of the Parameter Setting Out of Range allowable range Verify the parameter settings Duplicate functions were selected up down commands or trim control increase decrease were not set simultaneously Speed search from maximum frequency and set frequency were set simultaneously OPE03 PID is enabled and up input is Verify parameter settings Terminal Multi function Input Selection Error programmed More than one of the H1 01 H1 06 speed search inputs were set simultaneously or HSB and KEB functions were set simultaneously N O and N C fast stop are both set or drive enable and DC injection input are both set Run Command Selection Error 05 The run command selection Sequence Select parameter b1 02 is set to 3 but no option board is installed Serial communication option board Verify that the board is installed is not installed or the option board Remove power to the Drive and is installed incorrectly connect the option board once more Control met
260. sage example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Drive Command Message Response Message Response Message 9 During Normal Operation During Error Slave address 01 Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 88H Higher 00H Higher 00H Error Code 01H Test Code Test Code Lower 00H Lower 00H Higher 86H CRC 16 Higher ASH Higher ASH Lower 50H Data Data Lower 37H Lower 37H Higher DAH Higher DAH CRC 16 CRC 16 Lower 8DH Lower 8DH Fig D 8 Function Code 08H Message Example Write In Several Holding Registers 10H Write the specified data to the registers from the specified addresses The written data must be consecutive starting from the specified address in the command message Higher 8 bits then lower 8 bits in storage register address order The following table shows an example of a message when a forward run command and a speed command of 60 0 Hz has been set in slave 1 by the PLC IMPORTANT Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2 Handle response messages in the same way Command Message Response Message Response Message 9 During Normal Operation During Error Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Function Code 10H Function Code 10H Function Cod
261. same values for E1 07 and 1 09 In this case 40 0 t the setting for E1 08 will be disregarded Be sure that the four 400 0 frequencies set in the following manner or else OPE10 fault will occur E1 04 gt 12 gt E1 06 gt 1 07 gt E1 09 Maximum Output Voltage Ero Max Voltage Output voltage V 1 06 Base Frequency Base Frequency E1 07 Mid Output Frequency A Mid Frequency A 0 to 255 0 E1 08 Mid Output Voltage A 240V Mid Voltage VA 0 to 510 0 480V Minimum Output Frequency E1 09 Min Frequency E1 09 E1 07 1 06 El 11 E1 04 1 10 Miniumu Output Voltage Frequency Hz 240V Min Voltage 0 to 510 0 480V El ll Mid Output Frequency B Mid Frequency B Set only when the V f pattern is finely adjusted in the constant power HP area above base speed Adjustment is not normally El 12 Mid Output Voltage B required 0 0VAC Mid Voltage B Set only when the V f pattern is finely adjusted in the constant EI 13 Base Voltage power HP area above base speed Adjustment is not normally p Base Voltage required If E1 13 0 0 then value in E1 05 is used for E1 13 Auto tuning sets this value Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Loop Vector Parameters A 15 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Open Loop Vector Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting Fl
262. seconds 150 of rated output current Carrier frequency 2kHz Maximum output 300 0 2 frequency Rated output ga 13 0 21 0 26 0 30 0 38 0 capacity E e eee a 2 output current 0 0 ES 0 0 ES 4 Overload capacity of rated output 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 107 109 107 current for 60 sec Current limit limit 120 of rated output current Carrier 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 10 10 10 kHz Maximum output 400 0 H frequency 24 Maximum output voltage 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480Vac Proportional to input voltage 46 0 57 0 69 0 85 0 110 0 140 0 160 0 200 0 230 0 280 0 390 0 510 0 Horsepower 2 3 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 2 Rated output current A 60 0 75 0 91 0 112 0 150 0 180 0 216 0 260 0 304 0 370 0 506 0 675 0 gt Overload capacity 150 of rated output current for 60 seconds i 150 of rated output current Carrier frequency 2kHz Maximum output 42 output capacity 51 0 59 0 73 0 95 0 120 0 140 0 180 0 200 0 230 0 315 0 390 0 510 0 Horsepower 2 3 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 gt Rated output current A 67 2 77 0 96 0 125 0 156 0 180 0 240 0 260 0 304 0 414 0 515 0 675 0 Overload capacity of rated output current 107 117 114 108 115 120 108 120 120 107 118 1
263. settings are suitable Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 25 Main Circuit Test Procedure Before attempting any troubleshooting checks make sure that the three phase power is disconnected and locked out With power removed from the unit the DC bus capacitors will stay charged for several minutes The Charge LED in the Drive will glow red until the DC bus voltage is below 10Vdc To ensure that the DC bus is completely discharged measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltmeter set to the highest scale Table 6 6 Main Circuit Test Procedure Set the digital multi meter to its highest Vdc scale Measure between 1 and for the following check Measure DC Bus Voltage Place the positive red meter lead on 1 Place the negative black meter lead on Ifthe measured voltage is lt 10Vdc it is safe to work inside the Drive If not wait until the DC Bus has completely discharged The input diodes rectify or transform the three phase input AC voltage into a DC voltage 1 Set a digital multi meter to the Diode Check setting 2 Place the positive red meter lead on terminal R L1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal S L2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal T L3 Place the negative black met
264. specifications Description Cause Corrective Action UV Default DC Bus Undervolt 208 240Vac Trip point is 190 The acceleration time was set Extend the time in C1 01 Flashing 480Vac Trip point is 380Vdc too short Detected while Drive is i t d 7 Voltage fluctuation of the input power was tao utes Check the input voltage Cycle power to the Drive External load was T UV2 Control Power Supply Undervoltage pulling down the Drive s power Repair or replace the Power PCB Undervoltage of the control circuit when supplies or there was an internal Gate Drive PCB CTL PS Undervolt running short in the power gate drive board Remove all control wiring and test Drive Cycle power to the Drive Sot Charge Circuit Fau Comets on the charge Check the condition ofthe sof MC Answerback The pre charge contactor opened while the charge contactor does not charge contactor Drive was running function mechanically Repair or replace the Power PCB Gate Drive PCB Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 12 Operator Programming Errors An Operator Programming Error OPE occurs when an inapplicable parameter is set or an individual parameter setting is inappropriate The Drive will not operate until the parameter is set correctly however no alarm or fault outputs will occur If an OPE occurs change the appropriate parameter by checking the cause shown in Table 6 3 When OPE error i
265. specifications for the PG A2 are given in Table 2 17 Table 2 17 PG A2 Terminal Specifications Terminal Contents Specifications 12 Vdc 5 200 mA max Power supply for pulse generator 0 Vdc GND for power supply Terminals for switching between12 V voltage input and open collector input For open collector input short across 3 and 4 12 V open collector switching ter minals 4 to 12 V L 1 max Maximum response fre Pulse input terminals quency 30 Pulse input common 12 10 20 mA max Pulse monitor output terminals Pulse monitor output common Shield connection terminal BH PG B2 The terminal specifications for the PG B2 are given in Table 2 18 Table 2 18 PG B2 Terminal Specifications Terminal 4 Contents Specifications 12 Vdc 45 200 mA max Power supply for pulse generator 0 Vdc GND for power supply H 8 to 12V 1 max A phase pulse input terminals Maximum response frequency 30 kHz Pulse input common 8 to 12V 1 V max B phase pulse input terminals Maximum response frequency 30 kHz Pulse input common Open collector output 24 Vdc 30 mA max A phase monitor output terminals A phase monitor output common Open collector output 24 Vdc 30 mA max B phase monitor output terminals B phase monitor output common Shield connection
266. table stopping method will operate according to the stopping method selected f a fault occurs take appropriate action according to the table by investigating the cause To restart reset the fault with any of the following procedures Set 14 Fault Reset to a multi function digital input H1 01 to H1 06 Then close and open the input Press the RESET key of the digital operator Shut off the Drive input power and then turn on again Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display BUS Option Com Err CE Memobus Com Err CF Out of Control CPF00 COM ERR OP amp I NV CPF01 COM ERR OP amp I NV CPF02 BB Circuit Err CPF03 EEPROM Error CPF04 Internal A D Err Description Option Communication Error After initial communication was established the connection was lost Modbus Communication Error Control data was not received correctly for two seconds This fault is detected when 5 05 1 and 5 04 0 to 2 Control Fault A torque limit was reached continuously for 3 seconds or longer during a ramp to stop while in open loop vector control Operator Communication Fault Transmission between the Drive and the digital operator was not established within 5 seconds after supplying power External RAM of CPU was defective Operator Communication Fault After communication started with the digital operator communication stopped for 2 seconds or more Baseblock Circuit Fault
267. ter group for possible selections Effective when digital output card DO 02 or DO 08 is used Sets the function of the DO 08 digital output option board 0 8 channel individual outputs 1 Binary code output 2 Output according to F5 01 to F5 08 settings Communications Option Setup Selects the stopping method for a communication option board fault BUS Active only when a communication option board is installed and b1 01 or b1 02 3 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only Selects the condition in which an EFO fault is detected from a communication option board Active only when a communication option board is installed and b1 01 or b1 02 3 0 Always detected 1 Detected only during operation Selects the stopping method for an external fault from a communication option baord EFO Active only when a communication option board is installed and b1 01 or b1 02 3 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only Sets the sample trace for the CP 916 option board Selects the current monitor scaling when using a communication option board 0 Displayed in Amps 1 100 8192 12 bit binary number with 8192210096 Drive s rated current Selects torque reference limit when using communications option board 0 Torque reference limit from option board disabled 1 Torque reference limit from option board enabled Denotes that parameter can be changed when the
268. ter lead on terminal T L3 Expected reading is OL displayed The soft charge resistor works in conjunction with the soft charge contactor to slowly charge the DC bus capacitors to minimize the inrush current when power is applied to the Drive Soft Charge Resistor Check R1 R2 6PCB 1 Conduct a visual inspection Check for physical damage 2 Seta digital multi meter to the x 1 scale 3 Ifthe resistor is damaged the measured value will be infinite ohms The purpose of the soft charge contactor is to bypass the soft charge resistor after the DC bus voltage has reached its normal operating level Conduct a visual inspection Check for physical damage Set a digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale On Drives with a board mounted contactor verify that each contact resistance measures infinite ohms On Drives without a board mounted contactor press the plunger in and verify that each contact measures zero ohms Soft Charge Contactor On Drives without a board mounted contactor release the plunger and verify that the resistance is the ohmic value of the soft charge resistor On Drives with a board mounted contactor verify that the contactor coil measures about 300 ohms The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states On Drives without a board mounted contactor verify that the 230Vac contactor coil measures about 175 ohms The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate vo
269. termine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed There are 15 different preset V f patterns to select from E1 03 0 to E with varying voltage profiles base level base level frequency at which maximum voltage is reached and maximum frequencies Basic Programming 5 11 There are also settings for Custom patterns that will use the settings of parameters E1 04 through 1 13 1 03 F selects a custom V F pattern with an upper voltage limit and E1 03 FF selects a custom V F pattern without an upper voltage limit See figure below for the upper voltage limit Voltage Upper Limits for 208 240V Class Drives 250V Output Voltage E1 06 E1 06 40 Output Frequency E7U20P4 23P7 F7U24P0 2045 F7U2055 amp higher A 5V 2 5V 2 5V 35V 20V 15V 480V class Drives the values are twice that of 208 240V class Drives Fig 5 8 V F Pattern Voltage Upper Limit Basic Programming 5 12 Table 5 2 Preset V f Patterns Specifications 1 03 V f Pattern Specifications 1 03 V f Pattern High Starting Torque 1 High Starting Torque 2 High Starting Torque 1 High Starting Torque High Starting Torque 2 60 Hz with 50Hz Base General purpose 72Hz E 90Hz with 60 Hz Base E with 60Hz Base Variable Torque 1 120Hz with 60Hz Base Variable Torque 2 High Speed Operation Variable Torque 1
270. ternal condition EFO Option Board External Fault An external fault condition Verify the parameters Opt External Flt was present Verify communication signal EF3 Ext Fault 3 EF4 Ext Fault 4 EF5 External Fault at Terminal S3 S8 n An external fault condition odes Ext Fault S5 Detected when terminals 53 58 H1 01 to Eliminate the cause of the H1 06 are programmed for external fault Was present that was external fault condition EF6 function that stops the Drive using ramp to a multi funcion Ext Fault 56 stop coast to stop or fast stop digital PM EF7 Ext Fault 7 EF8 Ext Fault 58 SI F G Communication Error Detected A communication error is detected when a 5 5 15 Check the communications run command or frequency reference is set SI F G Com Err signals from an Option Card and continuous opera tion is set for the E 15 operation selection PID Feedback Loss Verify Drive is programmed to This fault occurs when PID Feedback Loss PID feedback source receive the PID feedback source Detection is programmed to fault e g transducer sensor signal b5 12 2 and the PID Feedback lt PID building automation signal is Feedback Loss Detection Level 65 13 for not installed correctly or is not Check to ensure the PID feedback the PID Feedback Loss Detection Time b5 working 14 properly FBL Feedback Loss Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 4 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and
271. the COPY CONTROL UNMATCHED control method of the stored data in the Function Digital Operator were different CYE COPY ERROR CSE SUM CHECK ERROR A parameter setting written to the Drive was different than the setting stored in the digital operator Upon completion of the COPY function the Drive s data checksum was different than the digital operator s data checksum Set 03 02 to 1 to enable writing parameters with the Digital Operator Retry the Read 03 01 1 Check the Digital Operator cable Replace digital operator A low Drive voltage has been detected Repeat the read Replace Digital Operator Use stored data for the product F7 and software number U1 14 Use stored data for the same Drive capacity 02 04 Use stored data for the same control method A1 02 Retry the Copy function 03 01 2 Retry the Copy function 03 01 2 Verify VYE The set value of the digital operator and the YERI ERROR pid E Sem iun Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 17 Troubleshooting Due to parameter setting errors faulty wiring etc the Drive and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started If this occurs use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures If a fault or alarm is displayed on the digital operator refer to Table 6 1 and Table 6 2 A Parameter Cannot Set Use the following information if a Drive parameter can
272. the DATA ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive Entry Accepted will briefly appear 11 Set the Drive input voltage measured in Step 1 In the Quick Setting menu go to parameter 1 01 Voltage This parameter sets the nominal input voltage the Drive will receive Table 4 2 Input Voltage Setting Parameter Parameter Name SOHO M E Digital Operator Display uA plici 155 0 to 255 0 240 0 Input Voltage Setting 208 240Vac 208 240Vac or Input Voltage 310 0 to 510 0 480 0 Programming 480Vac 480Vac 12 Select an appropriate V F pattern per the application Press the UP key once to display parameter E1 03 V F Selection To set this parameter press the DATA ENTER key once Use the UP and DOWN keys and the DATA ENTER key to set this parameter per the application A standard V F pattern for a 60Hz motor is 1 60 Hz Saturation Quick Setting 13 Set the PG Pulses Rev of the PG Encoder to the correct value In the Quick Setting menu go to parameter F1 01 PG Pulses Rev Use the UP DOWN and RESET keys and the DATA ENTER key to set the encoder PPR 14 Display motor speed monitor U1 05 Motor Speed in the Operation menu 15 Rotate the motor shaft by hand in the forward direction for the machine A low positive speed should be displayed PG B2 PG X2 PG W2 As the shaft is turned in reverse a low negative speed should be displayed If the speed
273. the drive s output voltage to the motor load This parameter helps to produce better starting torque It determines the amount of torque or voltage boost based upon motor current motor resistance and output frequency This parameter adjusts the filter on the output of the torque compensation function Increase to add stability decrease to improve response Sets torque compensation at forward start as a percentage of motor torque Sets torque compensation at reverse start as a percentage of motor torque Sets the time constant for torque compensation at forward start and reverse start C4 03 and C4 04 The filter is disabled if the time is set to 4 ms or less the Drive is running Parameters A 10 Control Method Loop Vector Setting Range Factory Setting 0 0 to 0 to 0 00 to 2 50 0 to 10000 0 0 to 200 0 00 0 0 to 200 0 0 to 200 Parameter No 5 01 5 02 5 03 5 04 ASR Limit C 05 ASR Limit C5 06 C5 07 C5 08 C6 01 C6 02 C6 03 C6 04 C6 05 Parameter Name Digital Operator Display ASR Proportional Gain 1 ASR P 1 ASR Integral Time 1 ASR I Time 1 ASR Proportional Gain 2 ASR P Gain 2 ASR I Time 2 ASR I Time 2 ASR Primary Delay Time Constant ASR Delay Time ASR Gain Switching Frequency ASR Gain SW Freq ASR Integral Limit ASR Integral Limit Drive Duty Selection Heavy Normal Duty Carrier Frequency Sel
274. the encoder 0 to 1024 A PG Pulses Rev pulse generator being used without any multiplication factor 60000 PPR Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 39 7 Monitor List Table A2 F7 Monitor List Parameter Parameter Name TOY E Digital Operator Display Description Display Units Ercauency Reference Frequency reference speed command monitor when in d y REMOTE mode frequency reference speed command set Set by o1 03 Frequency Ref ting location when in local mode 61 01 0 Output Frequency KE Output Freq Output frequency Set by o1 03 Output Current Control mode set in A1 02 0 V F without PG 1 V F with PG 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector Motor Speed z 2 Motor Speed Motor speed feedback Set by 01 03 Output Voltage Output Voltage Output voltage 0 1 Vac DC Bus Voltage DC Bus Voltage DC Bus Voltage 1 Vdc Output Power Output kWatts Output power 0 1 kW U1 09 Torque Reference Torque reference 0 1 Torque Reference Input terminal status 010010 Control Mode Control Mode FWD run Terminal S1 is ON REV run Terminal S2 is ON Multi function input 1 Terminal S3 is ON Input Terminal Status Multi function input 2 Input Term Sts Terminal S4 is ON L 1 Multi function input 3 Terminal S5 is ON Multi function input
275. the front cover using methods other than those described above or damage to the Digital Operator or Drive may occur IMPORTANT 2 Never attach the front cover to the Drive with the Digital Operator already attached Damage to the Digital Operator may occur Always attach the front cover to the Drive first and then attach the Digital Operator to the front cover Physical Installation 1 15 Models CIMR F7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300 For Models CIMR F7U2022 4030 and larger remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and front cover Removing the Digital Operator Use the same procedure for Models CIMR F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018 iRemoving the Front Cover Loosen all screws on the front cover Lift up at the location labelled at the top of the control circuit terminal card and move in the direction of arrow 2 Fig 1 14 Removing the Front Cover Mounting the Front Cover Attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it 1 Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover If the cover is attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it the Digital Operator may malfunction due to improper mating with its connector 2 Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Drive and press in on the cover until it clicks into place on the Drive B Mounting the Digital Operator Use the same procedure for
276. the set value is suitable and that the load is not too large for the motor The stall prevention level during running is too low If the value set for L3 06 Stall Prevention Level during Running is too low the motor speed and torque will be limited Check that the values set are suitable If the Motor Operates at a Higher Speed Than the Speed Command The following causes are possible BPID is enabled If the PID mode is enabled b5 01 1 to 4 the drive output frequency will change to regulate the process variable to the desired setpoint The PID can command a speed up to maximum output frequency 1 04 If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy Above Base Speed in Open loop Vector Control Mode The Drive s maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage For example if 230Vac is input then the maximum output voltage will be 230Vac Vector control uses voltage to control the currents within the motor If the vector control volt age reference value exceeds the Drive output voltage capability the speed control accuracy will decrease because the motor currents cannot be properly controlled Use a motor with a low rated voltage compared to the input voltage or change to flux vector control Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 20 If Motor Deceleration is Slow The following causes are possible deceleration time is long even when a braking resistor is connected The following causes are possi
277. ting of T1 03 is higher than the Drive s input voltage change the input voltage setting ncrease C1 01 Accel Time 1 Increase L7 01 and L7 02 Reverse Torque Limits if they are low f a motor and a machine are connected disconnect the motor from the machine Increase C1 01 Accel Time 1 Check the input data particularly the number of PG pulses and the number of motor poles f the motor and the machine are connected disconnect the motor from the machine Check Drive wiring and mounting Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 15 Digital Operator Display Er 13 Leakage Induc tance Fault End 1 V f Over Setting End 2 Saturation End 3 Rated FLA Alm Table 6 4 Auto Tuning Fault Displays and Processing continued Description Leakage Inductance Fault V F Settings Alarm Displayed after auto tuning is complete Motor Core Saturation Fault Detected only for rotational auto tuning Rated Current Setting Alarm Displayed after auto tuning is complete Probable Cause Auto tuning did not finish within the set time Auto tuning result is outside the parameter setting range The torque reference exceeded 100 and the no load current exceeded 70 during auto tuning During auto tuning the measured values of motor iron core saturation coefficient 1 and 2 E2 07 and E2 08 exceeded its setting range A temporary value was set E2 07 0 75 E2 08 0 50 Duri
278. top using the active deceleration time Coast to stop 2 Fast stop Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in 1 09 Alarm Drive continues operation Operation Selection at Devia tion PG Deviation Sel Phase A leads with forward run command Phase B leads with PG Rotation Selection reverse run command PG Rotation Sel Phase B leads with forward run command Phase A leads with reverse run command Sets the division ratio for the pulse monitor of the PG B2 encoder feedback option board This function is not available with the PG M X2 option board PG Division Rate PG Pulse Division ratio 1 n m n 0 to 1 m 1 to 32 Monitor The first digit of the value of F1 06 stands for the second and the 1 to 132 1 PG Output Ratio third stand for m from left to right The possible division ratio settings are 1 32 6 F1 06 61 Sets integral control during acceleration deceleration to either Integral function during enabled or disabled accel decel selection 0 Disabled The integral function isn t used while accelerating or Oto 1 0 PG Ramp PI I Sel decelerating 1 Enabled The integral function is used at all times F1 08 Configures the overspeed fault OS detection OS fault will occur if the motor speed feedback is greater than the Overspeed detection delay F1 08 setting for a time longer than F1 09 F1 08 is set as a 0 0 to F1 09 time percentage of the maximum output frequency E1 04 2 0 0 0 sec
279. tor R 1009 Modbus Communications RS 485 422 lt 19 2 Kbps S 11 0 2 Accuracy n 11 Bit Resolution 0 2 Accuracy 5 Accuracy Fig 2 15 Terminal Connections Electrical Installation 2 27 Control Circuit Wiring Precautions Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits 1 D SA Separate control wiring from power motor wiring terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 B1 B2 1 2 and 3 and other high power lines Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MB M2 3 4 5 and 6 digital outputs from wiring to other control circuit terminals If using an optional external power supply ensure it is a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source Use twisted pair or shielded twisted pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults Prepare cable ends as shown in Fig 2 16 Connect the shield wire to terminal E G Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment Shield sheath Insulation Do not connect here Connect to shield sheath terminal E G at Drive Insulate with tape Fig 2 16 Preparing the Ends of Twisted pair Cables Electrical Installation 2 28 Field Wiring Diagram Use this diagram to document field wiring It may be helpful to copy this page 52 53 54 55 57 58 5 SP 24VDC EG e Q V
280. tor value to 0 31 PID integral hold Closed Hold integrator at its present level 32 Multi Step Reference 4 Based on the status of Multi Step Reference 1 to 4 34 PID Soft Starter Cancel Closed b5 17 is ignored 35 PID Input Error Polarity Change Closed PID error signal polarity is reversed 1 to 1 or 1 to 1 60 DC Injection Braking Closed Apply DC injection current as set in parameter b2 02 61 Speed Search 1 Closed And a run command is given drive does a speed search starting at maximum frequency 1 04 Speed search based on b3 01 62 Speed Search 2 Closed And a run command is given drive does a speed search starting at frequency reference Speed search based on 53 01 63 Field Weakening Command Energy Savings Closed Field weakening control set for d6 01 and d6 02 64 Speed Search 3 Closed And a run command is given drive does a speed search starting at output frequency Speed search based on b3 01 65 Kinetic Energy Braking Ride thru N C Closed Normal operation Open KEB ride thru is enabled 66 Kinetic Energy Braking Ride thru N O Closed KEB ride thru is enabled 67 Communications Test Mode Used to test Modbus RS 485 422 interface 68 High Slip Braking Closed Drive stops using High Slip Braking regardless of run command status 69 Jog 2 Closed Drive runs at frequency reference entered into parameter d1 17 Direction determined by fwd rev input 3 wire control Only 6A Drive Ena
281. tpoint Selection PID Setpoint Sel PID Setpoint Value PID Setpoint 0 0 limit when PID output goes negative Drive stops 0 limit is automatic when reverse prohibit is selected using b1 04 1 Reverse when PID goes negative Drive reverses 0 Disabled 1 Alarm 2 Fault Sets the PID feedback loss detection level as a percentage of maximum frequency 1 04 Sets the PID feedback loss detection delay time in terms of sec onds Sets the sleep function start frequency Sets the sleep function delay time in terms of seconds Applies an accel decel time to the PID setpoint reference The Drive s standard softstarter C1 XX and s curve still effects the output of the PID algorithm Allows the b5 19 setting to be the PID target setpoint value 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Sets the PID target value Use only when b5 18 1 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 7 0 00 to 100 00 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting Loop Vector Reference Hold Dwell b6 01 Dwell Reference at Start Temporarily holds the frequency reference 7 Dwell Ref Stop 6 02 Dwell Time at Start Run command Dwell Time Start ON OFF b6 03 Dwell Frequency at Stop Dwell Ref Stop Output frequency Dwell Time at Stop Dwell Time Stop a Droop Control D Control Level Sets t
282. ts output transistors The friction of the driven equipment will eventually overcome any residual inertia of the system and the motor will stop ON Run Command OFF 100 j Output Frequency 0 Fig 5 4 Coast to Stop IMPORTANT After a stop is initiated subsequent run commands will be ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 has expired Basic Programming 5 6 2 DC Injection to Stop When the run command is removed the Drive will Baseblock turn off all output transistors for the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 Once the Minimum Baseblock Time has expired the Drive will inject DC current into the motor windings to try and lock the motor shaft The stopping time will be reduced as compared to Coast to Stop The level of DC Injection current is set by parameter b2 02 The DC Injection brake time is determined by the set value in b2 04 and the output frequency at the time the run command is removed b2 04 x 10 x Output Frequency DC Injection Brake Time Maximum Frequency E1 04 ON Run Command b2 04 x 10 OFF DC Injection 100 j Brake Time b2 04 Output Frequency TER o 100 Maximum DC Injection Braking 10 Output 21 Output Frequency at Stop Command Input 0 ra gt Minimum Baseblock DC Injection Braking Time Time L2 03 Fig 5 5 DC Injection Braking to Stop IMPORTANT If an overcurrent OC fault occurs during DC Injection Braking to
283. tting Range Model Dependent Factory Default Model Dependent The Motor Rated Current parameter E2 01 is used by the Drive to protect the motor and for proper Vector control when using Open Loop Vector or Flux Vector control methods 1 02 2 or 3 The motor protection parameter L1 01 is enabled by default Set E2 01 to the full load amps FLA stamped on the motor s nameplate During Auto tuning it is required for the operator to enter the motor s rated current T1 04 in the Auto Tuning menu If the Auto tuning operation completes successfully the value entered into T1 04 will automatically be written into E2 01 B 2 04 Number of Motor Poles Setting Range 21048 Factory Default 4 This parameter sets the number of motor poles During auto tuning it is required for the operator to enter the number of motor poles T1 06 in the Auto Tuning menu If the Auto tuning operation completes successfully the value entered into T1 06 will automatically be written into E2 04 B 2 11 Motor Rated Power Setting Range 0 00 to 650 00 kW Factory Default Dependent This parameter sets the motor rated power is set in kilowatts kW 1 0 746 KW During Auto tuning it is required for the operator to enter the motor s rated power T1 02 in the Auto Tuning menu If the Auto tuning operation completes successfully the value entered into T1 02 will automatically be written into E2 11 PG Option B F1 01 PG Pulses Revol
284. ult Message 6 h Input Terminal Status at Previous Fault U3 11 718 Most Recent Fault 02 11 The format is the same as for U1 10 Fault Message 7 Input Term Sts 8 Most Recent Fault U3 12 Fault Message 8 Output Terminal Status at Previous Fault ault Message The format is the same as for U1 11 U3 13 9 Most Recent Fault Output Term Sts Fault Message 9 Drive Operation Status at Previous Fault 10 Most Recent Fault U2 13 The format is the same as for U1 12 2 Fault Message 10 Status U3 15 Cumulative Operation Time at 5 Most Recent Fault U2 14 Cumulative Operation Time at Previous Fault z Elapsed Time 5 Elapsed time U3 16 Cumulative Operation Time at 6 Most Recent Fault Note Fault trace is not executed at 00 01 Elapsed Time 6 eee U3 17 Cumulative Operation Time at T Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 7 Cumulative Operation Time at 8 Most Recent Fault U3 18 Elapsed Time 8 Cumulative Operation Time at 9 Most Recent Fault U3 19 Elapsed Time 9 U3 20 Cumulative Operation Time at 10 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 10 Note Faults such as CPF00 01 CPF02 CPF03 UV1 and UV02 are not stored in fault history Parameters 43 Notes Parameters A 44 Appendix Capacity Related Parameters is appendix lists the parameters affected by the Drive Capacity setting of 02 04 Drive Capacity
285. umber of pulses per second of the output voltage waveform Setting range determined by C6 01 setting 0 Low noise 1 Fe 2 0 kHz 2 Fe 5 0 kHz ltoF 3 Fe 8 0 kHz 4 Fe 10 0 kHz 5 Fe 12 5 kHz 6 Fe 15 0 kHz F Program Determined by the settings of C6 03 thru C6 05 2 0 to Maximum carrier frequency allowed when C6 02 F 15 0 kHz 0 4 to Minimum carrier frequency allowed when C6 02 F 15 0 kHz Sets the relationship of output frequency to carrier frequency when C6 02 F 0 to 99 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 11 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Setting Factory Range Setting Vit Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display aay Preset References 41 01 Setting units are affected by 1 03 0 00Hz Reference 1 02 Frequency Reference 2 Frequency reference when multi function input Multi step speed 0 00H Reference 2 reference 1 is Setting units are affected by 01 03 2 41 03 Frequency Reference 3 equency reference when multi function input Multi step speed 0 00Hz Reference 3 erence 2 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 04 Frequency Reference 4 equency reference when multi function input Multi step speed 0 00Hz Reference 4 erence 1 2 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 i 41 05 Frequency Reference 5 equency reference when multi function input Multi step speed 0 00
286. un command is removed 0 Ramp to Stop b1 03 Stopping Method Selection 1 Coast to Stop Stopping Method 2 DC Injection to Stop 3 Coast with Timer A new run command is ignored if received before the timer expires Determines the forward rotation of the motor and if reverse de operation is disabled b1 04 Selection 0 Reverse Enabled P 1 Reverse Disabled 2 Exchange Phase Change direction of forward motor rotation Operation method when frequency reference is less than minimum Minimum Output Frequency output frequency set in E1 09 E1 09 or Less Operation 0 Operates according to frequency reference E1 09 is disabled Selection 1 Output shuts off coast to stop if less than E1 09 Zero Speed Oper 2 Operates according to E1 09 frequency reference set to E1 09 3 Zero speed frequency reference of zero is less than E1 09 Open Loop Vector Flux Vector Cycle External RUN If the run command is closed when switching from local mode to remote mode the drive will not run Accept External RUN If the run command is closed when switching from local mode to remote mode the drive WILL run Local Remote Run Selection LOC REM RUN Sel Run Command Selection Disabled Run command accepted only in the operation menu During Program Enabled Run command accepted in all menus RUN CMD at PRG except when b1 02 0 DC Injection Braking DC Injection Braking Start Sets the frequency at which DC injection brak
287. ution Setting Range 0 to 60000 Factory Default 1024 If a PG encoder option is used with the drive the number of PG pulses per motor revolution pulses rev must be set During Auto tuning it is required for the operator to enter the PG pulses per revolution T1 08 in the Auto Tuning menu If the Auto tuning operation completes successfully the value entered into T1 08 will automatically be written into F1 01 Basic Programming 5 19 Analog Output Gain H4 02 Terminal FM Gain Setting Range 0 0 to 1000 0 Factory Default 100 0 H4 05 Terminal AM Gain Setting Range 0 0 to 1000 0 Factory Default 100 0 These parameters set the gains for the analog output terminals FM and AM The analog outputs are used for external monitor ing of drive conditions such as output frequency output current PID feedback and others To obtain the output level multi ply the monitor output level by the gain set in H4 02 or H4 05 For example if H4 02 150 then the FM analog output will output 6 7Vdc when the assigned output function reaches the 100 level The analog output has a maximum of 10Vdc Output Function Level 6 7V 10V Analog Output Fig 5 10 Analog Output Example Basic Programming 5 20 Motor Overload Fault 11 01 Motor Overload Fault Selection 0 Disabled 1 Standard Fan Cooled Motor lt 10 1 motor factory default Standard Blower Cooled Motor gt 10 1 motor Vector Motor gt 1000
288. utput frequency E1 04 PID Setpoint 100 Maximum output frequency E1 04 Feedforward Control Output 100 Motor rated secondatry current H4 02 Terminal FM Gain Setting iv P dor Terminal FM Gain Sets terminal FM output level when selected monitor is at 100 H4 03 Terminal FM Bias Setting Terminal FM Bias Terminal AM Monitor Selec H4 04 tion Terminal AM Sel H4 05 Terminal AM Gain Setting Terminal AM Gain H4 06 4 07 4 08 Denotes that parameter be changed when the Drive is running Parameter No Description 15 16 Terminal FM Monitor Selection Terminal FM Sel Sets terminal FM output level when selected monitor is at 0 Selects which monitor will be output on terminals AM and FC Same function choices as H4 01 Sets terminal AM output voltage in percent of 10Vdc when selected monitor is at 100 output Terminal AM Bias Setting Terminal AM Bias Sets terminal AM output voltage in percent of 10Vdc when selected monitor is at 0 output Selects the signal level of terminal FM 0 0 10 Vdc 2 4 20 mA Set the analog output jumper 15 in the proper positition Terminal FM Signal Level Selection AO Level Select 1 Selects the signal level of terminal AM 0 0 10 Vdc 2 4 20 mA Set the analog output jumper 15 in the proper positition Terminal AM Signal Level Selection AO Level Select 2 Parameters A 29 Control Method Open Loop
289. uty Cycle on off 30 to 70 i Function set b 0 to 32kHz Pulse monitor Pulse output frequency 16 06 45V output Load 1 5 Modbus Differential input communication input For 2 wire RS 485 jumper R and and PHC isolation 422 Modbus jumper R and 5 Differential output communication output PHC isolation Signal common Electrical Installation 2 24 DIP Switch 1 and Jumper 15 Fig 2 13 DIP Switch S1 and Jumper CN15 Location B Dip Switch 1 DIP Switch S1 is described in this section The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in Table 2 12 51 222222222 D _ EE TD D Position 2 i DIP Switch S1 located on lt terminal board Fig 2 14 DIP Switch 1 Function Table 2 12 DIP Switch S1 Function OFF No terminating resistance ON Terminating resistance of 1100 Factory Default OFF RS 485 and RS 422 terminating resistance OFF 0 to 10 Vdc or 10 to 10Vdc internal resistance 20 Input method for analog input A2 ON 4 20mA internal resistance 2500 Factory Default ON m Jumper 15 Jumper 15 is described in this section The jumper position of CH1 and CH2 determines the signal level of the multifunction analog output FM and AM respectively The functions and positions of CN15 are shown in Table 2 13 CN15 CH1 oja o CH2 V
290. ux Vector Motor Setup Motor Rated Current Set to the motor nameplate full load current in amperes A This E E2 01 2 a Depen Depen Motor Rated FLA value is automatically set during auto tuning dant dant Motor Rated Slip Set to the motor rated slip in hertz Hz KVA 2 02 s Depen Depen Motor Rated Slip This value is automatically set during rotational auto tuning dant dint Set to the magnetizing current of the motor as a percentage of full kVA kV Motor No Load Current i 2 03 load amps 2 01 This value is automatically set during rotational Depen Depen No Load Current 4 auto tuning dant dant E2 04 Number of Motor Poles Set to the number of motor poles 21048 4 Number of Poles This value is automatically set during auto tuning Motor Linesto Dine Set to the phase to phase motor resistance in ohms W 0 000 to KVA E2 05 Resistance EN god p 65 000 Depen Term Resistance This value is automatically set by auto tuning E dant Motor Leakage Inductance Set to the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a per 0 0 to 2 06 centage of motor rated voltage Depen Leak Inductance 40 0 This value is automatically set during auto tuning dant Motor Iron core Saturation Set to the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50 of magnetic P 0 00 to E2 07 Coefficient 1 flux 0 50 0 50 Saturation Comp 1 This value is automatically set during rotational auto tu
291. value present when the speed torque control change is received Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 13 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name TW Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting Loop Vector m Field Weakening Magnetic Field Weakening Sets the drive output voltage when the multi function input field d6 01 Level weakening command is input H1 XX 63 Sets as a percentage 0 to 100 8096 A A Field Weak Lvl taking the voltage set in the V f pattern as 100 Sets the lower limit in hertz of the frequency range where field NS weakening control is valid The field weakening command is valid Magnetic Field Frequency 0 0 to d6 02 only at frequencies above this setting and only when output 0 0Hz A A Field Weak Freq 400 0 frequency is agreement with the current output frequency speed agree Magnetic Field Forcing Sets the magnetic field forcing function d6 03 Function Selection 0 Disabled Oto 1 Field Force Sel 1 Enabled V F Pattern 155 to Set to the nominal voltage of the incoming line Sets the maximum 255 0 Input Voltage Setting and base voltage used by preset V F patterns E1 03 0 to E 240V Input Voltage adjusts the levels of drive protective features i e overvoltage 310 to braking resistor turn on stall prevention etc 510 0 480V Set to the t
292. ver connect power factor correction capacitors or noise filters to the Drive output 12 Use 600Vac vinyl sheathed wire or equivalent Wire size should be determined considering voltage drop of leads Line voltage drop V 3 x wire resistance Q km x wire length m x current A x 10 13 It is recommended that the motor lead length not exceed 164 feet 50 meters and motor wiring be run in a separate conduit from the power wiring If lead length must exceed this distance reduce the carrier frequency See Table 2 6 and consult Yaskawa toll free at 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 for other motor protection measures 14 Signal and control leads must be separated from main circuit leads R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 15 Determine proper wire size for power and motor leads Refer to Tables 2 1 and 2 2 for details 16 Review proper ground connections for the Drive Refer to Chapter 2 Electrical Installation for details The Drive must be solidly grounded using the main circuit ground terminal Ground resistance should be less than 1000 for a 208 240Vac Drive Ground resistance should be less than 100 for a 480Vac Drive Select wire size suitable for the size of terminal screw Make the length as short as possible Never ground the drive in common with welding machines other motors or other large current electrical equipment Where several Drives are used ground each Drive directly or daisy chain to the ground pole s DO NOT FORM A L
293. ves Tightening possible Recommended Terminals Terminal Torque Wire Sizes Wire Size AWG Wire Type AWG mm mm Screws Ib in 1 52 53 54 55 56 87 58 SN SC SP Al A2 Stranded AC RP MI M2 M3 Phoenix 4 2 to 5 3 wire 4 5 6 type 3 0 5 to 0 6 26 to 16 Shielded twisted pair wire FM AC AM MP R R 0 14 to 1 5 Shielded polyethylene covered S S IG vinyl sheath cable 7 0 to 8 8 20 to 14 12 E G Mas 0 8 to 1 0 0 5 to 2 1 25 Use shielded twisted pair cables to input an external speed command 2 Yaskawa recommends using straight solderless terminals on digital inputs to simplify wiring and improve reliability 3 Yaskawa recommends using a thin slot screwdriver with a 3 5 mm blade width Electrical Installation 2 21 Wiring Checks After all wiring is completed perform the following checks 1 Is all wiring correct 2 Have all wire clippings screws or other foreign material been removed from the Drive enclosure 3 Are all terminal screws tight Electrical Installation 2 22 Control Circuit Terminal Functions The factory default functions of the control circuit terminals for 2 wire control are shown in Table 2 11 Table 2 11 Control Circuit Terminals E Signal Level Forward run stop command Forward run when CLOSED stopped when OFF Reverse run when CLOSED stopped when OFF
294. wing solutions are possible 1 Change the Drive s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 to lower the carrier frequency This will help to reduce the amount of transistor switching noise Install an Input Noise Filter at the Drive s input power terminals Install an Output Noise Filter at the Drive s motor terminals Use conduit Electrical noise can be shielded by metal so run the Drive s power leads in a conduit or shielded cable Ground the Drive and motor Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring cal Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 22 If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Drive is Run The Drive s output is a series of high frequency pulses PWM so there is a certain amount of leakage current This may cause the ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply Change to a ground fault interrupter with a higher leakage current detection level i e a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit with an operating time of 0 1 s or more or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures i e one designed for use with a Drive It will also help to change the Drive s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 to lower the carrier frequency In addition remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened If There is Mechanical Vibration Use the following information when there is mechanical vibration EThe application is making unusual sounds
295. xuere din C 2 Appendix D Communications D 1 Using Modbus Communication D 2 Modbus Function Code bere nb nn HER ne Rue D 8 Modbus Data Tables 0 10 Modbus Self Diagnosis intacto tes Tet EN D 18 Table of Contents ix Appendix E Peripheral Devices erreur ere u E 1 Branch Short Circuit 2 Peripheral 1 E UI ERE 4 Appendix F Spare e E F 1 F7 Primary Spare Parts 208 240 111 F 2 F7 Primary Spare Parts ASOVAG 3 Support Services Table of Contents x Chapter 1 Physical Installation This chapter describes the requirements for receiving and installing the F7 Drive F7 Model Number Enclosure Heat Loss and Weight 1 2 Confirmations upon Delivery 1 3 Component Names 1 5 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions 1 7 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site 1 11 Installation Orientation and Clearances 1 12 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover 1 13 Removing Attaching the Digital Op
296. ype of motor being used and the type of application The Drive operates utilizing a set V f pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed There are 15 different preset V f patterns to select from E1 03 0 to E with varying voltage profiles base levels base level frequency at which maximum voltage is reached and maximum frequencies There are also settings for Custom V f patterns that will use the settings of parameters E1 04 through E1 13 1 03 F selects a custom V F pattern with an upper voltage limit and 1 03 FF selects a custom V F pattern without an upper voltage limit 0 50 Hz 60 Hz 60Hz 50 Hz Base 72 Hz 60 Hz Base 0 to FF 50 Hz VTI 50 Hz VT2 60 Hz VTI 60 Hz VT2 50 Hz HSTI 1 V F Pattern Selection 4 5 6 T 8 9 50 Hz HST2 A B C D E Selection 60 Hz HST1 60 Hz HST2 90 Hz 60Hz Base 120 Hz 60Hz Base 180 Hz 60Hz Base Custom V F FF Custom w o limit Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 14 Table 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting HD 40 0 to Maximum Output Frequency These parameters are only applicable when V F Pattern Selection 300 0 E1 04 Max Frequency is set to Custom E1 03 F or FF To set V f characteristics in a ND2 60 0Hz straight line set the
297. zes are based on 75 degrees Celsius copper wire Note The use of a JST closed loop connector lug is recommended to maintain proper clearances Please contact your Yaskawa representative for more information Main Circuit Terminal Functions Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2 3 Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purpose Table 1 5 Circuit Terminal Functions 208 240Vac and 480Vac Model CIMR F7U E Terminal Designation 208 240Vac BOUE R L1 S L2 T L3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 RI L11 S1 L21 TI L31 2022 to 2110 4030 to 4300 Drive outputs U T1 V T2 W T3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 DC power input Qo 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 Main circuit power input Braking Resistor 20 4 to 2018 40P4 to 4018 Unit Connection Braking Transistor 2018 to 2110 4018 to 4300 Unit Connection DC reactor connection Hi 20P4 to 2018 40P4 to 4018 Ground B 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 Electrical Installation 2 8 Main Circuit Configurations 208 240Vac The 208 240Vac main circuit configurations of the Drive are shown in Table 2 4 Table 2 4 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 208 240Vac CIMR F7U20P4 to 2018 CIMR F7U2022 and 2030 3 amp RIL1 3 2 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 43 6 eh bd c 5

F7 Drive User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents